WO2022012388A1 - 一种通信方法及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022012388A1
WO2022012388A1 PCT/CN2021/105007 CN2021105007W WO2022012388A1 WO 2022012388 A1 WO2022012388 A1 WO 2022012388A1 CN 2021105007 W CN2021105007 W CN 2021105007W WO 2022012388 A1 WO2022012388 A1 WO 2022012388A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
paging
value
message
paging cycle
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/105007
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
邝奕如
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022012388A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022012388A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the fifth generation (5G) new radio (NR) technology follows the discontinuous reception (DRX) mechanism in the long term evolution (LTE) technology.
  • the DRX mechanism includes the DRX cycle, the terminal The device will "wake up” for a period of time in a DRX cycle, and at other times in the DRX cycle, the terminal device can remain in a "sleep" state to reduce power consumption.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device is in the radio resource control (RRC) idle state or the RRC inactive (inactive) state, if the core network device or the base station needs to send downlink data to the terminal device (for example, a call needs to be called to the terminal) device, or there is data that needs to be transmitted to the terminal device), it will first send a paging message to the terminal device for paging the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the paging message, it will initiate the RRC connection establishment process. Thereby, downlink data can be received.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the DRX cycle is also the paging cycle.
  • the base station will broadcast a common paging cycle of the cell, which is called the default paging cycle.
  • the terminal device can determine a paging cycle specific to the terminal device, which is called the UE-specific paging cycle. ).
  • the existing standard stipulates that the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the smaller value of the default paging cycle and the UE-specific paging cycle.
  • the UE-specific paging cycle is generally determined by the terminal device according to the service situation, which is more in line with the actual working situation of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a UE-specific paging cycle with a larger value according to the service delay requirement of the terminal device, since the default paging cycle is small, the terminal device will still use the default paging cycle, and the terminal device will still use the default paging cycle.
  • the actual wake-up frequency of the device is faster than the expected wake-up frequency of the terminal device, which is not conducive to the energy saving of the terminal device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device for reducing power consumption of a terminal device.
  • a first aspect provides a first communication method, the method comprising: receiving a first message from a network device, where the first message is used to indicate that one piece of indication information from the network device is associated with multiple paging occasions PO of a terminal device , the indication information is used to wake up the terminal equipment or not to wake up the terminal equipment; determine the value of N, where N is the number of POs of the terminal equipment associated with an indication information, and the value of N is the same as that of the terminal equipment.
  • the dedicated paging cycle is related, and N is a positive integer; first indication information is received from the network device; monitoring conditions of N POs of the terminal device are determined according to the first indication information.
  • the method may be performed by a first communication apparatus, and the first communication apparatus may be a communication apparatus or a communication apparatus, such as a chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the communication apparatus to implement the method.
  • the first communication apparatus is a terminal device, or a chip provided in the terminal device for implementing the function of the terminal device, or other components for implementing the function of the terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the network device is, for example, an access network device, or a core network device, or if the access network device and the core network device are combined into the same device in a future communication system, the network device may be the device.
  • the indication information may be associated with multiple paging occasions, that is, even if the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is small, the terminal device may only monitor a part of the POs in the paging cycle, The remaining POs in the paging cycle do not need to monitor. Since the number of POs to be monitored is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • determining the value of N includes:
  • a second message is received from the network device, where the second message is used to indicate the value of N.
  • the terminal device may determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device. In this way, the terminal device can determine the value of N by itself, without the need for an instruction from the network device, which can reduce signaling interaction and save signaling overhead.
  • the network device can send a unicast message to the terminal device, and the network device can also notify the terminal device of the value of N through the second message, so that the terminal device does not need to determine the value of N again.
  • the value can simplify the implementation of the terminal device, and is beneficial to apply the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application to more terminal devices with lower capabilities.
  • determining the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device including:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be a second value, and the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle.
  • the terminal device can determine the value of N only according to the magnitude relationship between the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, and the method is relatively simple.
  • the second value is based on the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle Determined values, including:
  • the second value the dedicated paging cycle/the system default paging cycle.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is more in line with the terminal device’s paging cycle. business needs.
  • the value of N is, for example, 1, which indicates that the paging granularity of the network to the terminal device is refined to each PO, which can reduce the probability that the terminal device misses paging.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is greater than the system default paging cycle, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the system default paging cycle, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is longer than the cycle required by the service of the terminal device. Be small.
  • N can be determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, so that the value of N (ie, the second value) can not only meet the service requirements of the terminal device, but also minimize the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • determining the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device including:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the second value;
  • the first value and the second value are both preconfigured values.
  • N There may be a correspondence between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N, which is another correspondence. If the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is more in line with the terminal device’s paging cycle. business needs. At this time, N can be 1, indicating that the paging granularity of the network to the terminal device is refined to each PO, which can reduce the probability that the terminal device misses paging.
  • N may be a second value.
  • the second value is greater than the first value, the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced as much as possible by applying the second value.
  • both the first value and the second value are pre-configured, and do not need to be calculated by the terminal device, which can simplify the implementation of the terminal device.
  • the value of N is determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, including:
  • the value of N is determined according to the value range to which the dedicated paging cycle belongs, wherein different value ranges correspond to different values of N, and the number of value ranges is greater than or equal to 3.
  • the terminal device may be a correspondence between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N, which is another correspondence. In this way, more ranges can be divided, and the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the value range to which the dedicated paging cycle belongs. Since the divided value ranges can be more and narrower, the determined value of N can be more accurate.
  • the method further includes:
  • the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N can be specified by the protocol, then the terminal device can determine the relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device according to predefined information Corresponding relationship; or, the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N can be pre-stored in the terminal device; or, the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N is also It can be configured by network equipment (eg, access network equipment) and sent to terminal equipment.
  • network equipment eg, access network equipment
  • the access network device may send a third message, which may indicate the correspondence between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N, and the third message is, for example, a broadcast message or a unicast message.
  • the terminal device can obtain the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N, so that the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging message, or to instruct not to monitor the paging message, and the paging control information is used to schedule the paging message ;or,
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging, or to instruct not to monitor the paging.
  • monitoring a paging can be understood as monitoring a PO, that is, monitoring a message sent by the network in the PO, and the message sent by the network in the PO includes, for example, paging control information, or includes paging control information and paging messages.
  • the first indication information may be included in the DCI before the first PO of a paging cycle, where the DCI is, for example, WUS.
  • the first indication information may indicate to monitor the paging, or to indicate not to monitor the paging.
  • the WUS is located before the PO in the time domain.
  • the terminal device does not need to monitor in N POs, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device to a large extent.
  • the first indication information may also be included in the paging control information. For example, when the WUS is not sent, the first indication information may also be sent through the paging control information, so that the first indication information can be sent normally.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and according to the first indication information Determine the monitoring situation of N POs of the terminal device, including:
  • the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging message, then, monitor the paging message from the network device in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO, the remaining Paging messages from the network device are monitored within the PO; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored, then, the paging message from the network device is not to be monitored in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO Paging messages from the network device are not monitored in the remaining POs of the .
  • the N POs associated with the first indication information may include the PO where the DCI is located, and N-1 consecutive POs located after the PO;
  • the N POs associated with the indication information may also include any N POs in the paging cycle.
  • the N POs may be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain, and the N POs may include the PO where the DCI is located. , or may not include the PO where the DCI is located; or, the N POs associated with the first indication information may also include N POs in multiple paging cycles, and the N POs may include the PO where the DCI is located, Alternatively, the PO where the DCI is located may not be included.
  • the terminal device may monitor the paging message or not monitor the paging message in the N POs according to the instruction of the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can affect the "sleep" and "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs, that is, the first indication information can either indicate that the terminal device is dormant within the N POs, or can also indicate The wake-up of the terminal device within N POs is more comprehensive.
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before PO, and according to the first The indication information determines the monitoring of the N POs of the terminal device, including:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate monitoring paging, then, monitoring paging control information in the N POs, or monitoring paging control information and paging messages in the N POs; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging is not to be monitored, then, the paging control information and/or the paging message are not to be monitored within the N POs.
  • the N POs associated with the first indication information may include consecutive N POs starting from the first PO after the WUS; Alternatively, the N POs associated with the first indication information may also be any N POs included in the paging cycle, and these N POs may be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain; or, the first indication information is associated with any N POs.
  • the N POs may also include N POs in multiple paging cycles. Then the terminal device can monitor the paging or not monitor the paging within the N POs according to the instruction of the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can affect the "sleep" and "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs, that is, the first indication information can either indicate that the terminal device is dormant within the N POs, or can also indicate The wake-up of the terminal device within N POs is more comprehensive.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and according to the first indication information Determine the monitoring situation of N POs of the terminal device, including:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate to monitor the paging message, then, monitor the paging message from the network device in the current PO; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored, then, the paging message from the network device is not to be monitored in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO Paging messages from the network device are not monitored in the remaining POs of the .
  • the first indication information may affect the "sleep" of the terminal device within the N POs, but does not affect the "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs. Then, for example, the first indication information indicates to monitor the paging message, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information in the PO where the paging control information is located, and if the received paging control information includes the scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information The device monitors the paging message in the PO. After receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc.
  • the terminal device is not paged; or, if the first indication information indicates not to monitor the paging message, the terminal device is in N POs associated with the first indication information. There is no need to monitor paging messages. Equivalently, if the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, then it is considered that the first indication information is not associated with N POs, and the terminal device only needs to monitor normally in the PO where the first indication information is located; If the indication information indicates not to monitor paging, it is considered that the first indication information is associated with N POs, and the terminal device does not need to monitor paging messages in the N POs associated with the first indication information. In this way, the first indication information only indicates that the terminal device is sleeping within N POs, so as to achieve the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before PO, and according to the An indication information to determine the monitoring of the N POs of the terminal device, including:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate monitoring paging, then, monitoring the paging control information in the first PO after the downlink control information before the PO, or monitoring the paging control information and the paging message; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging is not to be monitored, then, the paging control information and the paging message are not to be monitored within the N POs.
  • the first indication information can affect the "sleep" of the terminal device within the N POs, but does not affect the manner in which the terminal device "wakes up” within the N POs.
  • the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, then the terminal device can monitor the paging control information in the first PO after the WUS, or monitor the paging control information and the paging message; or, the first indication information indicates not to monitor paging, the terminal device neither needs to monitor the paging control information nor the paging message in the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, then it is considered that the first indication information is not associated with N POs, and the terminal device only needs to normally monitor the POs located after the first indication information; If the indication information indicates not to monitor paging, it is considered that the first indication information is associated with N POs, and the terminal device neither needs to monitor the paging control information nor monitor the paging control information in the N POs associated with the first indication information. call message. In this way, the first indication information only indicates that the terminal device is sleeping within N POs, so as to achieve the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the method also includes:
  • the first indication information corresponds to a first group to which the terminal device belongs, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices.
  • terminal devices may be divided into different groups, and the division factors may include one or more.
  • a division factor is the paging cycle of the terminal device, and the paging cycle of the terminal device is, for example, the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or it can also be the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device, and the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device. It is the smaller of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the default paging cycle of the system.
  • the paging cycle can be divided into one or more ranges, each of which corresponds to a group. If the paging cycle of a terminal device is located in one of the ranges, the terminal device belongs to the group corresponding to the range. .
  • each of the one or more groups can be made to correspond to a kind of indication information.
  • the indication can be indicated by grouping when the indication information is used.
  • the terminal equipment may not Indicating information to respond, which can reduce the false alarm probability of the terminal equipment.
  • the division result can be made more reasonable, and the power consumption of the terminal equipment can be reduced.
  • the method also includes:
  • Send first information where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
  • the terminal device Whether the terminal device supports multiple POs associated with the indication information of the terminal device;
  • a plurality of POs of the terminal device are requested to be associated with the indication information.
  • the terminal device can notify the core network device of the capabilities or requirements of the terminal device through the first information, so that the subsequent network paging mode for the terminal device can meet the capabilities or requirements of the terminal device as much as possible.
  • a second communication method comprising: sending a first message, where the first message is used to indicate that one piece of indication information from the network device is associated with multiple paging occasions PO of the terminal device, the The indication information is used to wake up the terminal equipment or not to wake up the terminal equipment; determine the value of N, N is the number of POs of the terminal equipment associated with an indication information, and the value of N is related to the dedicated paging of the terminal equipment. Period correlation, N is a positive integer; first indication information is sent, and the first indication information is associated with N POs.
  • the method may be performed by a second communication apparatus, and the second communication apparatus may be a communication apparatus or a communication apparatus, such as a chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the communication apparatus to implement the method.
  • the second communication apparatus is a network device, or a chip provided in the network device for implementing the function of the network device, or other components for implementing the function of the network device.
  • the second communication apparatus is a network device.
  • the network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • determining the value of N includes:
  • the value of N is determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • determining the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device including:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined as a second value, and the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle.
  • the second value is based on the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle Determined values, including:
  • the second value the dedicated paging cycle/the system default paging cycle.
  • the value of N is determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, including:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the second value;
  • the first value and the second value are both preconfigured values.
  • the value of N is determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, including:
  • the value of N is determined according to the value range to which the dedicated paging cycle belongs, wherein different value ranges correspond to different values, and the number of value ranges is greater than or equal to 3.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first wake-up information is included in the paging control information, the first wake-up information is used to indicate monitoring of paging messages, or used to indicate not to monitor paging messages, and the paging control information is used to schedule paging messages ;or,
  • the first wake-up information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the first wake-up information is used to indicate monitoring of paging, or to indicate not to monitor paging.
  • the method further comprises:
  • the terminal device Whether the terminal device supports multiple POs associated with the indication information of the terminal device;
  • a plurality of POs of the terminal device are requested to be associated with the indication information.
  • the first indication information corresponds to a first group to which the terminal device belongs, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices.
  • a third communication method comprising: receiving a first message from an access network device, where the first message includes first grouping information, the first grouping information is used to indicate the first group, and the first group includes one or more terminal equipments; determine that the first terminal equipment belongs to the first group, wherein the first group is divided according to the paging cycle of the terminal equipment; in the first message Monitor paging within the associated PO.
  • the method may be performed by a third communication apparatus, and the third communication apparatus may be a communication apparatus or a communication apparatus, such as a chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the communication apparatus to implement the method.
  • the third communication apparatus is a terminal device, or a chip provided in the terminal device for implementing the function of the terminal device, or other components for implementing the function of the terminal device.
  • the third communication apparatus is a terminal device, for example, the terminal device is a first terminal device.
  • terminal devices are grouped, so that the terminal devices can be paged in a grouping manner.
  • the terminal device may not monitor the corresponding PO, which can reduce the number of terminals The false alarm probability of the device.
  • the paging cycle can be used to divide the grouping of the terminal equipment, and the grouping method is more reasonable, and the power consumption of the terminal equipment can be better reduced.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is a dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or a paging cycle actually used by the terminal device, wherein the terminal device
  • the paging cycle used in practice is the smaller of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the default paging cycle of the system.
  • the paging cycle may refer to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or may also refer to the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device, which is not specifically limited.
  • the first message is downlink control information located before PO, and in the Monitor paging in the PO associated with the first message, including:
  • the paging control information is monitored in the PO associated with the downlink control information, or the paging control information and the paging message are monitored.
  • the first message may be DCI before the first PO of a paging cycle, eg WUS.
  • the PO associated with the first message may refer to one or more POs located after the WUS.
  • the one or more POs may be continuous POs or discontinuous POs in the time domain, and this one One or more POs may be located in one paging cycle, or may be located in multiple paging cycles.
  • the first terminal device can monitor the paging control information in one or more POs located after the WUS.
  • the first message is paging control information, and in the first message Monitor paging within the associated PO, including:
  • the paging message is monitored in the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the first message may also be paging control information. Then, the first message may be associated with one or more POs. If the first message is associated with one PO, this one, for example, refers to the PO where the paging control information is located; or, if the first message is associated with multiple POs, the number of POs.
  • the POs may include the PO where the paging control information is located, and at least one PO that is located after the PO where the paging control information is located, or, the multiple POs associated with the first message may not include the paging control information.
  • the PO where the paging control information is located only includes at least one PO after the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the multiple POs may be continuous POs in the time domain, or may also be discontinuous POs, and the one or more POs may be located in a paging cycle, Alternatively, it may be within multiple paging cycles.
  • the PO associated with the first message refers to the PO where the paging control information is located. Then, if the first terminal device belongs to the first group, indicating that the group where the first terminal device is located is paged, the first terminal device can Paging messages are monitored within the PO.
  • the fourth optional embodiment of the third aspect can be In selected embodiments, the method further comprises:
  • a second message is received from the access network device, the second message includes grouping rule information, the grouping rule information includes information of at least one group, and a page corresponding to each group in the at least one group the range of values for the period; or,
  • a second message is received from the access network device, where the second message is used to indicate a group to which the first terminal device belongs.
  • the terminal devices When grouping terminal devices, different division factors can be used. Then, under different division factors, the terminal devices can have corresponding grouping methods. For example, for the first terminal device, grouping according to the paging cycle, and The paging probability is grouped. Obviously, the grouping methods are different, and the groups to which the first terminal equipment belongs are also different.
  • the second message may enable the terminal equipment to be grouped through the paging cycle, that is, the access network device may indicate through the second message to enable the method of grouping through the paging cycle, then the first terminal device can It is determined that the group to which the first terminal device belongs is the corresponding group in the case of grouping according to the paging cycle.
  • the access network device may also not need to use a special message to enable the method of grouping the terminal devices through the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can still send the second message, but the second message includes grouping rule information, which is equivalent to that, by sending the grouping rule information, the access network device implicitly instructs to enable the terminal equipment to be processed through the paging cycle. grouping method. After the first terminal device receives the grouping rule information, the group to which the first terminal device belongs can be determined according to the grouping rule information and a corresponding division factor (eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device).
  • the access network device does not need to enable the method of grouping the terminal equipment through the paging cycle through a special message, nor does it need to send the grouping rule information to the terminal equipment.
  • the access network device may send a second message to the first terminal device, where the second message is a unicast message, and the second message may indicate a group to which the first terminal device belongs. That is, the access network device can determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs, and notify the first terminal device of the information of the group to which the first terminal device belongs, so that the first terminal device does not need to determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs.
  • the access network device indicates the group to which the first terminal device belongs, which is also equivalent to implicitly indicating a manner of enabling the grouping of the terminal device through the paging cycle. In this way, signaling overhead can be saved, and the workload of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • the method further comprises:
  • the first terminal device may send the dedicated paging cycle to the core network device through a NAS message, such as a registration request message, or other NAS messages in the registration process, or a corresponding response after the registration is completed.
  • NAS messages such as a registration request message, or other NAS messages in the registration process, or a corresponding response after the registration is completed.
  • a fourth communication method comprising: sending a first message, where the first message includes first grouping information, the first grouping information is used to indicate a first grouping, and the first grouping includes one or more terminal devices; determine that the first terminal device belongs to the first group, wherein the first group is divided according to the paging cycle of the terminal device; paging all the terminals in the PO associated with the first message the first terminal device.
  • the method may be performed by a fourth communication apparatus, and the fourth communication apparatus may be a communication apparatus or a communication apparatus, such as a chip, capable of supporting the functions required by the communication apparatus to implement the method.
  • the fourth communication apparatus is a network device, or a chip provided in the network device for implementing the function of the network device, or other components for implementing the function of the network device.
  • the fourth communication apparatus is a network device.
  • the network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is a dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or a paging cycle actually used by the terminal device, wherein the terminal device
  • the paging cycle used in practice is the smaller of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the default paging cycle of the system.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second message includes grouping rule information, where the grouping rule information includes information about at least one group and a value range of the paging cycle corresponding to each group in the at least one group; or ,
  • the method further include:
  • a dedicated paging cycle for the first terminal device is received from the first terminal device.
  • a communication device configured to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, for example, the communication device is the first communication device described above; or, the communication device is configured to execute In the third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, for example, the communication device is the third communication device described above.
  • the communication apparatus may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, for example, a processing module and a transceiver module; or, the communication apparatus may include a module for The modules for performing the method in the third aspect or any possible implementation manner of the third aspect include, for example, a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module, and the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the communication apparatus is a communication device, or a chip or other components provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver module can also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module can also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module but capable of implementing different functions.
  • the transceiver is implemented by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, a codec and the like in the communication device.
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected with the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Send and receive information through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device configured to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, for example, the communication device is the second communication device described above; or, the communication device is configured to execute For the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, for example, the communication device is the fourth communication device described above.
  • the communication apparatus may include a module for executing the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, for example, a processing module and a transceiver module; A module for performing the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, for example, includes a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module, and the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the communication apparatus is a communication device, or a chip or other components provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the transceiver module can also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module can also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module but capable of implementing different functions.
  • the transceiver is implemented by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, a codec and the like in the communication device.
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected with the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Send and receive information through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device in a seventh aspect, includes one or more processors, and optionally, a communication interface, which can be used to communicate with other apparatuses or devices.
  • the communication device may further include one or more memories for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled to each other to implement the methods described in the first aspect or various possible implementation manners of the first aspect, for example, the communication device is the first aspect described above.
  • a communication device; or, for implementing the method described in the third aspect or various possible implementation manners of the third aspect, for example, the communication device is the aforementioned third communication device.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and at least one memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the communication apparatus may also include one or more computer programs stored in one or more memories, the one or more computer programs comprising computer instructions.
  • the communication apparatus executes the third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the communication apparatus is a communication device, or a chip or other components provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a codec in the communication device implement etc.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output pins, etc.
  • the transceiver component realizes the sending and receiving of information.
  • a communication device in an eighth aspect, includes one or more processors, and optionally, a communication interface, which can be used to communicate with other devices or devices.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled to each other to implement the method described in the second aspect or various possible implementation manners of the second aspect, for example, the communication device is the second aspect described above.
  • a communication device; or, for implementing the method described in the fourth aspect or various possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, for example, the communication device is the fourth communication device described above.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and one or more memories may be external to the communication device.
  • the communication apparatus may also include one or more computer programs stored in one or more memories, the one or more computer programs comprising computer instructions.
  • the communication apparatus is a communication device, or a chip or other components provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a codec in the communication device implement etc.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output pins, etc.
  • the transceiver component realizes the sending and receiving of information.
  • a communication system comprising the communication device of the fifth aspect or the communication device of the seventh aspect, and the communication device of the sixth aspect or the communication device of the eighth aspect communication device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, where the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect
  • the method described in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the computer is caused to execute the method described in the third aspect or any one possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed on a computer, the computer is made to execute the second aspect or the second aspect above.
  • the method described in any one possible implementation manner of the aspect, or the computer is caused to execute the method described in the above fourth aspect or any one possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, the computer program product being used to store a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect
  • the method described in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, or the computer is caused to execute the method described in the third aspect or any one possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned second aspect or the second aspect
  • the method described in any one possible implementation manner of the above-mentioned fourth aspect or the method described in any one possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect is caused to the computer.
  • the terminal device can monitor only a part of POs in the paging cycle, and the remaining POs in the paging cycle do not need to monitor. Since the number of POs that need to be monitored is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a first communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a kind of schematic diagram of the time domain position relationship between WUS and PO;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a monitoring situation of a terminal device in N POs in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic diagram of a monitoring situation of a terminal device in N POs in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of a monitoring situation of a terminal device in N POs in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a further schematic diagram of a monitoring situation of a terminal device in N POs in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the PO monitored by the terminal device after the method described in the embodiment of the present application is adopted;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is another schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Terminal devices including devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data connectivity sexual equipment.
  • it may include a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal equipment can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscription unit (subscriber unit), subscription station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • M2M/MTC machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscription unit subscriber unit
  • subscription station subscriber
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal
  • a mobile phone or "cellular" phone
  • a computer with a mobile terminal device, a portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-embedded mobile device, and the like.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • constrained devices such as devices with lower power consumption, or devices with limited storage capacity, or devices with limited computing power, etc.
  • information sensing devices such as barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), and laser scanners.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as on-board terminal equipment.
  • the on-board terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • the terminal device may further include a relay (relay).
  • a relay relay
  • any device capable of data communication with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the terminal device may be the terminal device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the apparatus may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • Network equipment including, for example, access network (AN) equipment, such as a base station (for example, an access point), which may refer to a device in the access network that communicates with wireless terminal equipment over the air interface through one or more cells , or, for example, a network device in a vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology is a roadside unit (RSU).
  • the base station may be used to interconvert the received air frames and IP packets, acting as a router between the terminal equipment and the rest of the access network, which may include the IP network.
  • the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity supporting V2X applications and can exchange messages with other entities supporting V2X applications.
  • the network device can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in the LTE system or long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include fifth generation mobile
  • NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B in the LTE system or long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A)
  • LTE-A long term evolution-advanced
  • the next generation node B (gNB) in the communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) NR system (also referred to as the NR system) may also include a cloud radio access network (Cloud RAN) system
  • a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • the network equipment may also include core network equipment.
  • the core network equipment includes, for example, an access and mobility management function (AMF) or a user plane function (UPF) in the 5G system. etc., or include the mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME) in the 4G system, etc.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • MME mobility management entity
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the apparatus may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the device for realizing the function of the network device being a network device as an example.
  • the terminal device can periodically enter the sleep state without monitoring the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • RRC state the terminal device has three RRC states: RRC connected (connected) state, RRC idle state and RRC inactive state.
  • RRC connected state (or, it can also be referred to as connected state.
  • connected state and “RRC connected state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device has established an RRC connection with the network, which can data transfer.
  • RRC idle state (or, can also be referred to as idle state.
  • idle state and “RRC idle state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, the base station The context for this end device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection establishment process.
  • RRC inactive state (or, may also be referred to as RRC inactive state, or simply inactive state or inactive state.
  • RRC inactive state or, may also be referred to as RRC inactive state, or simply inactive state or inactive state.
  • deactive state “inactive state”, “deactive state”, “Deactivated state”, “inactive state”, “RRC inactive state” or “RRC deactivated state”, etc., are the same concept, and these terms can be interchanged):
  • the terminal device entered the RRC connection at the anchor base station before. state, and then the anchor base station releases the RRC connection, but the anchor base station saves the context of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device needs to re-enter the RRC connected state from the RRC inactive state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection recovery process (or referred to as an RRC connection re-establishment process) at the base station where it currently resides. Because the terminal device may be in a mobile state, the base station where the terminal device currently resides and the anchor base station of the terminal device may be the same base station, or may be different base stations. Compared with the RRC establishment process, the RRC recovery process has shorter delay and lower signaling overhead. However, the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of this application may be used interchangeably.
  • “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or”, which describes the relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, it can indicate that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one (a) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, and timing of multiple objects , priority or importance, etc.
  • first value and the second value may or may not be the same. They are called “first” and “second” only for the convenience of description, and do not indicate the difference in value, priority, or importance of these two features.
  • the 5G NR technology follows the DRX mechanism in the LTE system.
  • the DRX mechanism includes the DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device in the RRC connection state will periodically "wake up” for a period of time in the DRX cycle.
  • the time when the terminal device "wakes up” is called the on duration time period.
  • the end device can remain in a "sleep" state to reduce power consumption.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, if the core network device or the base station needs to send downlink data to the terminal device, for example, a call needs to be called to the terminal device, or there is downlink data that needs to be sent to the terminal device.
  • the core network or the base station will first send a paging message to the terminal device for paging the terminal device. After receiving the paging message, the terminal device will initiate an RRC connection establishment process to receive downlink data.
  • the paging mechanism can be further divided into core network (core network, CN) paging and radio access network (radio access network, RAN) paging.
  • core network core network
  • RAN radio access network
  • the corresponding paging mechanism is CN paging
  • the corresponding paging mechanism is RAN paging.
  • a terminal device in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state only "wakes up" to receive paging messages at its own paging occasion (PO).
  • the terminal device At the PO of the terminal device, the terminal device first receives downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) used to indicate a paging message.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the DCI may also be called paging control information, and is used to indicate the time-frequency for sending a paging message. Resource location.
  • the terminal device After receiving the paging control information, receives a paging message according to the scheduling of the paging control information.
  • the paging message carries the identification of the terminal device (for example, the identification number (ID) of the terminal device), it means that the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process to access the base station; If the call message does not carry the ID of the terminal device, it means that the terminal device has not been paged, and the terminal device can continue to "sleep" until the next PO and then "wake up” to monitor the paging control information.
  • the paging control information is transmitted on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and the paging message is transmitted on a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the DRX cycle is also the paging cycle.
  • the base station will broadcast the common paging cycle of the cell, which is called the default paging cycle.
  • the terminal device can determine the paging cycle specific to the terminal device, which is called the UE-specific paging cycle.
  • the paging cycle values defined in the existing standards include 0.32s, 0.64s, 1.28s, and 2.56s, that is, the UE-specific paging cycle can be one of these values, and the default paging cycle can also be these values. one of the values.
  • the UE-specific paging cycle is generally determined by the terminal device according to the service situation, which is more in line with the actual working situation of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines a UE-specific paging cycle with a larger value (eg 2.56s) according to the delay requirement of the terminal device's service, the default paging cycle is small (eg 1.28s), the terminal device The default paging cycle (for example, 1.28s) is still used, and the frequency that the terminal device actually wakes up is faster than the frequency that the terminal device expects to wake up, which is not conducive to the energy saving of the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal equipment is the UE-specific paging cycle
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the larger of the default paging cycle and the UE-specific paging cycle;
  • Rule 3 The terminal device and the network negotiate to determine the paging cycle value actually used by the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal equipment may be larger than the default paging cycle, which will affect the paging cycle in the network.
  • the mechanism of system information change has a greater impact on the network.
  • the concept of the modification period (MP) of system information is defined in the LTE system.
  • the system information may be transmitted multiple times in one MP, but in the same MP, the system information (for example, including the paging configuration) system information) will not change.
  • the base station When the base station wants to modify some system information in the system information, the base station will first notify the terminal equipment through a paging message in an MP that the system information is about to change (but the base station does not send and use the new system in the current MP). information), at the boundary where the next MP starts, the base station will use the new system information, and within the next MP, the base station will send the new system information.
  • the MP In the existing standard mechanism, the MP is associated with the default paging cycle, and the base station needs to ensure that the PO of each terminal device in an MP must appear at least once to notify the change of the system information.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device may be larger than the default paging cycle, then the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is likely to be larger than the MP, then within an MP, it is very likely that the PO of the terminal device is once will not appear, which will affect the mechanism of system information change, so that the network cannot notify the terminal device of the change of system information.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal equipment is likely to be smaller than the paging cycle actually required by the terminal equipment, which is not conducive to the energy saving of the terminal equipment.
  • the original determination rule of the paging cycle may continue to be used, so as to reduce the impact on the network and be more compatible with the existing technology.
  • the indication information may be associated with multiple paging occasions, that is, even if the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is small, the terminal device can monitor only a part of the POs in the paging cycle. , and the remaining POs in the paging cycle do not need to monitor. Since the number of POs to be monitored is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, such as the LTE system, or can be applied to the 5G system, such as the NR system, or can also be applied to the next generation mobile communication system or other similar communication systems, which are not specifically limited.
  • the 4th generation, 4G the 4th generation, 4G system
  • the 5G system such as the NR system
  • next generation mobile communication system or other similar communication systems which are not specifically limited.
  • Figure 1 is an application scenario of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1 includes access network equipment, core network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. If the terminal device is in the RRC inactive state, the access network device can page the terminal device, and if the terminal device is in the RRC idle state, the core network device can page the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment and core network equipment for example, work in the evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestrial Radio Access (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) system, or work in the NR system, or work in the next generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • E-UTRA evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestrial Radio Access
  • NR next generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the core network device in FIG. 1 is, for example, an MME in a 4G system, or an AMF in a 5G system, or a corresponding core network device in a next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the access network device in FIG. 1 is, for example, a base station.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems, for example, in a 4G system, it may correspond to an eNB, and in a 5G system, it corresponds to an access network equipment in 5G, such as a gNB.
  • the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems, so the access network equipment in FIG. 1 can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems.
  • FIG. 1 takes the access network device being a base station as an example.
  • the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
  • the terminal device in FIG. 1 takes a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device in this embodiment of the present application is not limited to a mobile phone.
  • monitoring a paging can be understood as monitoring a PO, that is, monitoring a message sent by the network in the PO, and the message sent by the network in the PO includes, for example, paging control information, or includes paging control information and paging messages.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a first communication method, through which power consumption of a terminal device can be reduced.
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of the method.
  • the method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in the RRC idle state, and the paging described in the following may be regarded as the paging initiated by the core network device.
  • the method is performed by the core network device, the access network device and the terminal device as an example.
  • the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal device sends the first information to the core network device, and the core network device receives the first information from the terminal device.
  • the first information may indicate one or more of the following: whether the terminal device supports the indication information, whether the terminal device supports one or more POs associated with the indication information of the terminal device, energy saving requirements, or a request to associate the indication information with the terminal device. Multiple POs.
  • the first information may indicate that the terminal device supports the indication information or does not support the indication information; or, the first information may indicate that the terminal device supports the indication information associated with a PO of the terminal device, or indicates that the terminal device supports the indication information associated with the terminal device's PO.
  • the first information may indicate that the terminal device has energy saving requirements; alternatively, the first information may request to associate the indication information with one or more POs of the terminal device; alternatively, the first information may indicate whether the terminal device supports the indication information , and one or more POs indicating whether the terminal device supports the indication information associated with the terminal device, and so on.
  • the indication information can be sent by a network device, for example, an access network device or a core network device, or in the future communication system, the access network device and the core network device may be combined into the same network device, then the network device Can refer to the network device.
  • the indication information can wake up the terminal device or not. More about the instructions will be introduced later.
  • the function that the terminal device supports the indication information is referred to as the first function
  • the function that the terminal device supports the indication information associated with multiple POs of the terminal device is referred to as the second function.
  • a terminal device is generally capable of supporting a PO associated with the terminal device indicating that information is associated with the terminal device, so this function is not discussed here.
  • the first function and the second function may have an associated relationship, that is, supporting the first function also means supporting the second function, or supporting the second function means supporting the first function; similarly, not supporting the first function also means supporting the first function. It indicates that the second function is not supported, or that the second function is not supported also indicates that the first function is not supported. If this is the case, the first information may indicate whether the terminal device supports the indication information.
  • the first information indicates that the terminal device supports the indication information, it also implicitly indicates that the terminal device supports the indication information associated with multiple POs of the terminal device. However, if the first information indicates that the terminal device does not support the indication information, it also implicitly indicates that the terminal device does not support multiple POs associated with the terminal device with the indication information; or, the first information may indicate whether the terminal device supports the indication information associated with the terminal. Multiple POs of the device, if the first information indicates that the terminal device supports the multiple POs associated with the terminal device, it also implicitly indicates that the terminal device supports the instruction information, and if the first information indicates that the terminal device does not support the instruction information Multiple POs associated with the terminal device also implicitly indicate that the terminal device does not support the indication information. That is, the first information only needs to indicate whether the terminal device supports one function (the first function or the second function), and does not need to indicate too many contents, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the first information only needs to indicate whether the terminal device supports one function (the first function or the second function), and does not
  • the first function and the second function may not have an associated relationship.
  • the first information may be indicated separately for the first function and the second function.
  • the first information may indicate whether the terminal device supports the indication information, or whether the terminal device supports the indication information associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, or whether the terminal device supports the indication information, and whether the terminal device supports the indication information Multiple POs associated with the end device.
  • different functions can be indicated separately to make the indication more clear, and two functions can be decoupled to facilitate separate control.
  • the first function and the second function do not have an associated relationship, then there may be a situation that the terminal device supports the first function but does not support the second function.
  • the terminal device supports the indication information, It may be indicated that the terminal device supports one PO whose indication information is associated with the terminal device, but since the terminal device does not support the second function, the terminal device does not support multiple POs whose indication information is associated with the terminal device. But if the terminal equipment supports the second function, the terminal equipment should also support the first function.
  • the terminal device may carry the first information in a non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) message and send it to the core network device, where the NAS message is, for example, a registration request (registeration request) message, or may also be a registration process other NAS messages in , or other NAS messages after the registration is completed.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the core network device sends the first information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the first information from the core network device.
  • S21 to S22 are equivalent to describing the situation of one of the terminal devices.
  • S21 to S22 may also be replaced by the terminal device sending the first information to the access network device, and the access network device receiving the first information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may send the first information to the access network device in the random access process, for example, the first information may be carried in the third message (Msg3) in the random access process and sent to the access network device; or, The terminal device may also send the first information to the access network device after the random access succeeds, for example, the first information may be carried in an RRC message (eg, UE capability information message) and sent to the access network device.
  • the access network device may send the first information to the core network device.
  • S21 to S22 may not need to be performed or replaced with other steps, that is, the terminal device does not send the first information, and the access network device and the core network device also do not receive the first information. It can be seen that S21 to S22 are optional steps, which are represented by dotted lines in FIG. 2 .
  • the access network device sends the first message, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may indicate that the second function is enabled, or in other words, the first message may indicate that one piece of indication information from the access network device is associated with multiple POs of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may determine whether to enable the first information according to the first information of the one or more terminal devices and in combination with other corresponding factors Two functions. Determining whether to enable the second function in combination with the first information of the terminal device can make the determination result of the access network device as consistent as possible with the requirements of the terminal device. For example, if more than half of the first information obtained by the access network device indicates that the corresponding terminal device supports the second function, the access network device may enable the second function, and if the access network device obtains the second function If more than half of the first information indicated that the corresponding terminal device does not support the second function, the access network device may not enable the second function.
  • the access network device may not send the first message, that is, not perform S23; or, if the access network device does not enable the second function, the access network device may also The first message can be sent, but the first message at this time indicates that the second function is not enabled, or the first message indicates that an indication from the access network device cannot be associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, or the first message Indicates that an indication from the access network device is associated with a PO of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may also determine whether to enable the second function according to a relevant policy of the access network device. If it is determined that the second function is enabled, the access network device sends the first message, and if it is determined that the second function is not enabled, the access network device may not send the first message, that is, S23 is not performed; If the network device does not enable the second function, the access network device can also send the first message, but the first message at this time indicates that the second function is not enabled, or the first message indicates an indication from the access network device The information cannot be associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, or the first message indicates that one indication information from the access network device is associated with one PO of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send the first message in a broadcast manner, or in other words, the first message may be a broadcast message.
  • the first message may be system information (system information), or the first message may also be other broadcast messages other than system information.
  • the access network device and the terminal device may have negotiated in advance, and the terminal device can enable the second function, or the protocol stipulates that the terminal device can enable the second function, then the access network device may not send the first message, that is, , S23 may not be executed. Therefore, S23 is an optional step, which is indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 2 .
  • the first message includes a 1-bit field. If the 1-bit field exists or is included in the first message, it indicates that an indication information from the access network device is associated with the terminal. For the multiple POs of the device, if the 1-bit field does not exist or is not included in the first message, it means that an indication from the access network device is not associated with the multiple POs of the terminal device.
  • the first message includes a 1-bit field, and if the value of the 1-bit field is "1", it indicates that an indication information from the access network device is associated with the terminal For the multiple POs of the device, if the value of the 1-bit field is "0", it means that an indication from the access network device is not associated with the multiple POs of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines the value of N, where N is the number of POs of the terminal device associated with one indication information. Wherein, if the terminal device receives the first message, and the first message indicates that the second function is enabled, or indicates that a piece of indication information from the access network device is associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, the terminal device may perform S24; or, If the terminal device does not receive the first message, or the received first message indicates that the second function cannot be enabled, or indicates that an indication from the access network device cannot be associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, or indicates that the access network device An indication information of the terminal device is associated with a PO of the terminal device, then the terminal device may not need to perform S24.
  • the terminal device may determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device may be implemented in different ways, which are described below with examples.
  • the first realization relationship of the corresponding relationship is: the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is the first value; or, the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is greater than the system default paging cycle, and N is second value.
  • the first value can be 1, or can be other values, as long as the first value is a positive integer;
  • the second value can be a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, and the second value is also positive integer.
  • the second value is greater than the first value, or there is no restriction on the magnitude relationship between the first value and the second value.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is 1.28s
  • the system default paging cycle that is, the default paging cycle indicated by the access network device through broadcasting
  • N is the first value
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is 1.28s
  • the system default paging cycle ie, the default paging cycle indicated by the access network device through broadcasting
  • N is the second value.
  • the second value dedicated paging cycle/system default paging cycle
  • the second value 2 at this time, that is, one indication information is associated with two POs.
  • "/" here represents the relationship of division, that is, the second value is equal to the value obtained by dividing the dedicated paging cycle by the system default paging cycle.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is more in line with the terminal device’s paging cycle. business needs.
  • N can be 1, indicating that the paging granularity of the network to the terminal device is refined to each PO, which can reduce the probability that the terminal device misses paging.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is greater than the system default paging cycle, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the system default paging cycle, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is longer than the cycle required by the service of the terminal device. Be small.
  • N can be determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, so that the value of N (that is, the second value) can not only meet the service requirements of the terminal device, but also minimize the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the first implementation manner of the corresponding relationship can be specified by the protocol, then the terminal device can determine the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device according to predefined information;
  • An implementation manner may be pre-stored in the terminal device; or, the first implementation manner of the corresponding relationship may also be configured by a network device (eg, an access network device) and sent to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send a third message, where the third message may indicate the first implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, and the third message is, for example, a broadcast message.
  • the terminal device can obtain the first implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, so that the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the second implementation of the corresponding relationship is: the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is the first value; or, the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is greater than the system default paging cycle, N is second value.
  • the first value and the second value are both pre-configured values.
  • the first value may be 1, or may be other values, as long as the first value is a positive integer;
  • the second value may be 2, or may be other values, as long as the second value is a positive integer .
  • the second value is greater than the first value, or there is no restriction on the magnitude relationship between the first value and the second value.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is 1.28s
  • the system default paging cycle that is, the default paging cycle indicated by the access network device through broadcasting
  • N is the first value
  • N is 1
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is 1.28s
  • the system default paging cycle ie, the default paging cycle indicated by the access network device through broadcasting
  • N is the second value.
  • the second value is 2, that is, one indication information is associated with two POs.
  • the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, so the paging cycle actually used by the terminal device is more in line with the terminal device’s paging cycle. business needs.
  • N can be 1, indicating that the paging granularity of the network to the terminal device is refined to each PO, which can reduce the probability that the terminal device misses paging.
  • N may be a second value. For example, if the second value is greater than the first value, the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced as much as possible by applying the second value.
  • the terminal device may have a risk of missing paging. For example, if the dedicated paging cycle is 1.28s, and the system default paging cycle is 0.64s, the appropriate second value is 2. Then, if the second value is set to be greater than 2, for example, 3, an indication message is associated with 3 POs, if the indication information indicates not to wake up the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment will not listen in these 3 POs, but the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal equipment is 1.28s, it is possible that the first one of these 3 POs The PO or a third PO will have a page from the terminal device, then the terminal device may miss the page.
  • the terminal device may consume more power to monitor, but it can reduce The probability that a small terminal device misses a page. And, even if the terminal device consumes more power to monitor, compared with the existing paging mechanism, the power consumption of the terminal device can still be reduced.
  • the second implementation manner of the corresponding relationship can be specified by the protocol, and the terminal device can determine the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device according to predefined information;
  • the two implementation manners may be pre-stored in the terminal device; or, the second implementation manner of the corresponding relationship may also be configured by a network device (eg, an access network device) and sent to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send a third message, and the third message may indicate the second implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, and the third message is, for example, a broadcast message.
  • the terminal device can obtain the second implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, so that the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • each value range in the divided multiple value ranges corresponds to a value of N
  • different value ranges can be Corresponding to different values of N.
  • the number of the divided value ranges may be greater than or equal to 3.
  • three value ranges can be divided, and Table 1 can be referred to for these three value ranges.
  • the first range means that the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, or it is understood that the first range refers to the range less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, if the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle By default paging cycle, the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the first range.
  • the second range may include one or more values. If the second range includes one value, if the value of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is equal to the value, it indicates that the value of the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the first Two ranges; if the second range includes multiple values, then if the value of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is equal to any of the multiple values, it indicates that the value of the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the second range . For example, if the second range is ⁇ 1.28s ⁇ , if the dedicated paging cycle is 1.28s, it indicates that the value of the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the second range, otherwise the dedicated paging cycle does not belong to the second range.
  • the dedicated paging cycle is 1.28s or 2.56s, it means that the value of the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the second range; otherwise, if the dedicated paging cycle is Neither 1.28s nor 2.56s indicates that the dedicated paging cycle does not belong to the second range.
  • the third range may also include one or more values. If the third range includes one value, then if the value of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is equal to the value, it indicates that the dedicated paging cycle The value belongs to the third range; if the third range includes multiple values, then if the value of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device is equal to any of these multiple values, it indicates the value of the dedicated paging cycle belong to the third range. For example, the second range and the third range may have no intersection.
  • the second range is ⁇ 1.28s ⁇ and the third range is ⁇ 2.56s ⁇ .
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal equipment is 1.28s, and the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the second range, and the value of N is 2;
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the device is 2.56s, and the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, then the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the second range, and the value of N is 4; If the paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle (for example, the dedicated paging cycle is 0.64s, and the system default paging cycle is 0.64s), the dedicated paging cycle belongs to the first range, and the value of N is 1.
  • the third implementation manner of the corresponding relationship can be specified by the protocol, and the terminal device can determine the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device according to predefined information;
  • the three implementation manners may be pre-stored in the terminal device; or, the third implementation manner of the corresponding relationship may also be configured by a network device (eg, an access network device) and sent to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send a third message, where the third message may indicate a third implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, and the third message is, for example, a broadcast message.
  • the terminal device can obtain the third implementation manner of the corresponding relationship, so that the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • N in Table 1 is just an example, and in addition, the division of the value range is just an example, and in practice, more or less value ranges may be divided.
  • the above are just a few examples of the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle and the value of N, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit that there may be other corresponding relationships between the dedicated paging cycle and the value of N.
  • one of them can be selected for use, and which one to choose can be specified by the protocol, or can also be selected by the network, for example, selected by the access network device and notified to the terminal device.
  • the core network device sends a paging message, such as a first paging message, to the access network device, and the access network device receives the first paging message from the core network device.
  • a paging message such as a first paging message
  • the first paging message may include paging information, and may include a dedicated paging cycle for the terminal device.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device may be sent by the terminal device to the core network device, for example, the terminal device may send the dedicated paging cycle to the core network device through a registration request message.
  • the access network device does not know the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, so the core network device can send the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the value of N should also be determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device. The way in which the access network device determines the value of N is similar to the way in which the terminal device determines the value of N, and will not be repeated here. .
  • the core network device may also send the first information of the terminal device to the access network device, for example, the core network device may include the first information in the first paging.
  • the message is sent to the access network device.
  • the indication information is sent by the access network device and has nothing to do with the core network device, so the core network device can page the terminal device according to the normal mechanism.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information from the access network device.
  • the first indication information sent by the access network device may be associated with N POs, wherein the access network device can also determine the value of N in the same manner as the terminal device. Or, if the first message of the access network device indicates that the second function is enabled, but the access network device determines according to the first information of the terminal device that the terminal device does not support the second function, the first indication information sent by the access network device A PO can be associated.
  • the access network device sends the The first indication information of can be associated with a PO, that is, the second function is not enabled.
  • a wake-up signal (WUS).
  • the WUS is used to indicate whether the terminal device needs to wake up and monitor paging control information and paging messages in the PO corresponding to the WUS.
  • the time domain location of the WUS may be: an offset (offset) location before the first PO in a paging cycle.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging control information in these two POs, or monitors the paging control information and the paging message; or if the WUS indicates that the terminal device does not need to monitor, the terminal device monitors the two POs. There is no need to monitor paging control information and paging messages within a PO.
  • the first indication information may be included in downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) before the first PO of a paging cycle, and the DCI is, for example, WUS.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the location where the terminal device receives WUS can be configured as a narrow time-frequency location, so receiving WUS consumes less power than receiving other DCIs, which is more conducive to energy saving of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may indicate to monitor the paging, or to indicate not to monitor the paging.
  • monitoring paging refers to monitoring paging control information, or monitoring paging control information and paging messages; not monitoring paging refers to monitoring neither paging control information nor paging messages.
  • the N POs associated with the first indication information may include consecutive N POs starting from the first PO after the WUS; or, the N POs associated with the first indication information may also be the paging cycle Any N POs included in the N POs may be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain; alternatively, the N POs associated with the first indication information may also include N POs in multiple paging cycles.
  • the WUS does not include the first indication information, it may be associated with one or more POs.
  • the PO associated with the WUS itself is made consistent with the PO associated with the first indication information, that is, Both the WUS and the first indication information are associated with the N POs, so as to avoid misunderstanding of the terminal device due to inconsistent association.
  • the first indication information may not be included in the WUS, but is included in the paging control information. Using this method, there is no need to introduce other signals (such as WUS), and the paging control information in the paging mechanism is directly multiplexed, so that the changes on the terminal equipment and the network equipment side are small, and the implementation is easier. Then, the first indication information may indicate to monitor the paging, or to indicate not to monitor the paging.
  • monitoring paging refers to monitoring paging control information, or monitoring paging control information and paging messages; not monitoring paging refers to monitoring neither paging control information nor paging messages.
  • the first indication information since the first indication information is included in the paging control information, for the current PO (that is, the PO where the paging control information including the first indication information is located), the first indication information indicates Whether to monitor paging messages, for other POs in the N POs except the current PO, the first indication information indicates whether to monitor paging control information, or whether to monitor paging control information and paging messages.
  • the N POs associated with the first indication information may include the PO where the DCI is located, and N-1 consecutive POs located after the PO; or, the N POs associated with the first indication information may also include Any N POs in the paging cycle, these N POs may be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain, and these N POs may include the PO where the DCI is located, or may not include the PO where the DCI is located.
  • the N POs associated with the first indication information may also include N POs in multiple paging cycles, and the N POs may include the PO where the DCI is located, or may not include the PO where the DCI is located.
  • the terminal devices may be divided into different groups, and the division factors may include one or more.
  • a division factor is the paging cycle of the terminal device, and the paging cycle of the terminal device is, for example, the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or it can also be the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device, and the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device. It is the smaller of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the default paging cycle of the system. Then, the paging cycle can be divided into one or more ranges, each of which corresponds to a group.
  • the terminal device belongs to the group corresponding to the range.
  • another dividing factor is the ID of the terminal device, and the ID of the terminal device can be divided into one or more ranges, each of which corresponds to a group, if the paging cycle of a terminal device is within one of the ranges , the terminal device belongs to the group corresponding to the range.
  • another division factor is the value of N corresponding to the terminal device, for example, the terminal devices with the same value of N are divided into one group.
  • the division factors may also include multiple types.
  • the division factors may include the paging cycle of the terminal device and the ID of the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is firstly divided into one or more ranges, some or all of which are in the range.
  • one or more sub-ranges may be further divided according to the ID of the terminal device, and then each sub-range may correspond to a group.
  • the division factor includes the paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N corresponding to the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is firstly divided into one or more ranges, each of which is part of the range or the whole range.
  • one or more sub-ranges may be further divided according to the value of N corresponding to the terminal device, and then each sub-range may correspond to a group.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit other division factors and division manners.
  • the division rule information (or referred to as grouping rule information) can be specified by a protocol, and the terminal device can determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the protocol.
  • the grouping rule information may also be configured by a network device (eg, an access network device). If configured by the access network device, the access network device can inform the terminal device, for example, the access network device can send the grouping rule information through a broadcast message.
  • the grouping rule information may include information of one or more groups, and a range corresponding to each of the one or more groups (eg, a value range of a paging cycle, or a range of other corresponding division factors).
  • each of the one or more groups can be made to correspond to a kind of indication information.
  • the indication information may occupy one or more bits, and different values (or different states) of the one or more bits correspond to different groups; for another example, the indication information may be a bitmap, The bitmap includes one or more bits, and each bit in the one or more bits represents a packet. If the value of a certain bit in the bitmap sent by the access network device is "1", it indicates that the indication information corresponds to the If the value of a certain bit in the bitmap sent by the access network device is "0", it indicates that the indication information does not correspond to the group corresponding to the corresponding bit.
  • the corresponding relationship between the grouping and the indication information can also be specified by the protocol, or the corresponding relationship between the grouping and the indication information can be configured by the access network device, and the access network device can inform the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send the correspondence between the packet and the indication information through a broadcast message.
  • the corresponding relationship between the grouping and the indication information can also be specified by the protocol, or the corresponding relationship between the grouping and the indication information can be configured by the access network device, and the access network device can inform
  • a terminal device such as an access network device, may send the correspondence between the packet and the indication information through a broadcast message. In this case, the correspondence between the packet and the indication information may be included in the grouping rule information.
  • the indication can be indicated by grouping when the indication information is used. For a terminal equipment, if it is determined that the indication information does not correspond to the group to which the terminal equipment belongs, the terminal equipment may not Indicating information to respond, which can reduce the false alarm probability of the terminal equipment.
  • the first indication information corresponds to the first group, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices.
  • the terminal device determines the monitoring conditions of the N POs of the terminal device according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the monitoring conditions of the N POs according to the first indication information. Alternatively, if the terminal device is divided into groups, after receiving the first indication information, the terminal device may determine whether the first indication information is the indication information corresponding to the group to which the terminal device belongs. If the first indication information is the indication information corresponding to the group to which the terminal device belongs, the terminal device may determine the monitoring situation of N POs of the terminal device according to the first indication information; otherwise, the terminal device may not respond to the first indication information .
  • the terminal device belongs to the first group, and the first indication information also corresponds to the first group, so the terminal device determines that the first indication information is the indication information corresponding to the group to which the terminal device belongs. Then, the terminal device can determine the monitoring situation of the N POs of the terminal device according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the monitoring conditions of the N POs according to the first indication information included in the WUS.
  • the first indication information may affect "sleep" and "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs. Then, for example, the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information within N POs associated with the first indication information, or monitor the paging control information and paging messages (for example, the terminal device is in Each PO in the N POs will monitor the paging control information.
  • the terminal device continues to monitor the paging message at the PO, then the terminal device In this PO, it is to monitor the paging control information and paging messages; and if the paging control information monitored in some POs does not include the scheduling information of the paging messages, the terminal equipment does not need to monitor the paging messages at the PO, then the terminal In this PO, the device monitors the paging control information, but does not monitor the paging message); or, if the first indication information indicates not to monitor the paging, the terminal device does not need to monitor the N POs associated with the first indication information. Paging control information also does not need to monitor paging messages.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate the monitoring and paging, and then a paging message including the identification of the terminal device is sent in one or more POs among the N POs. If the terminal device does not need to be paging, the first indication information can be used to indicate that the paging is not to be monitored. In this way, the first indication information can not only indicate that the terminal equipment is sleeping within N POs, but also can indicate that the terminal equipment is awake within N POs, and the indication is more comprehensive.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the monitoring situation of terminal equipment in N POs.
  • the horizontal axis of Fig. 4 represents time.
  • the oblique-lined rectangle before PO represents WUS.
  • the terminal device receives the WUS before the first PO, the WUS includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates monitoring paging.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging control information at both the first PO (that is, the first PO from left to right) and the second PO (that is, the second PO from left to right) after the WUS, If the paging control information monitored in a PO includes the scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device continues to monitor the paging message in the PO.
  • the terminal device After receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identifier of the terminal device (for example, the ID of the terminal device), then the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc., or, if the paging message does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not is paged; or, if the paging control information monitored by the terminal device in a PO does not include the scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging message in the PO. For another example, for the third PO from left to right in FIG.
  • the terminal device receives the WUS before the third PO, the WUS includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates not to monitor the paging. Then, neither the first PO (that is, the third PO from left to right) nor the second PO (that is, the fourth PO from left to right) of the terminal device after the WUS does not monitor the paging control information , and does not listen for paging messages.
  • the first indication information may affect the "sleep" of the terminal device within the N POs, but does not affect the "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs. Then, for example, the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information in the first PO after the WUS, or monitor the paging control information and the paging message; or, the first indication information indicates If the paging is not monitored, the terminal device neither needs to monitor the paging control information nor the paging message within the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates to monitor paging
  • the terminal device only needs to normally monitor the POs located after the first indication information
  • the indication information indicates not to monitor paging
  • the terminal device neither needs to monitor the paging control information nor monitor the paging control information in the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • call message For the access network device, if it needs to page the terminal device, it can first indicate the monitoring of the paging message through the first indication information, and then send the identifier including the terminal device in the first PO after the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored. In this way, the first indication information only indicates that the terminal device is sleeping within N POs, so as to achieve the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the monitoring situation of the terminal equipment in N POs.
  • the oblique-lined rectangle before PO represents WUS.
  • the terminal device receives the WUS before the first PO, the WUS includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates monitoring paging.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging control information at the first PO after the WUS (ie, the first PO from left to right), if the paging control information monitored in the PO includes the scheduling information of the paging message , the terminal device continues to monitor the paging message in the PO.
  • the terminal device After receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device (for example, the ID of the terminal device), the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device An RRC connection can be further established with the access network device, etc., or, if the paging message does not include the identity of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged; or, if the terminal device monitors the paging control information in the PO If the scheduling information of the paging message is not included, the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging message in the PO. For another example, for the second PO from left to right in FIG. 5 , the terminal device receives the WUS before the second PO, the WUS includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates not to monitor the paging. Then neither the first PO (ie, the second PO from left to right) nor the second PO (ie, the third PO from left to right) after the WUS by the terminal device monitors the paging control information , and does not listen for paging
  • the terminal device may determine the monitoring conditions of the N POs according to the first indication information included in the paging control information. It should be noted that, in this case, since the first indication information is included in the paging control information, for the current PO (that is, the PO where the paging control information including the first indication information is located), the first indication information indicates Whether to monitor paging messages, and for other POs in the N POs except the current PO, the first indication information indicates whether to monitor paging control information, or whether to monitor paging control information and paging messages.
  • the first indication information may affect "sleep" and "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs. Then, for example, the first indication information indicates monitoring of paging, the terminal device may monitor the paging within N POs associated with the first indication information. Among them, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information in the N POs, or not monitor the paging control information, but for the access network device, the paging control information can still be sent in the N POs. Because in addition to paging the terminal equipment, the access network equipment may also page other terminal equipment, and the value of N corresponding to other terminal equipment may be different from the value of N corresponding to the terminal equipment.
  • the access network device will send paging control information at each PO to avoid some terminal devices from being unable to receive the paging control information.
  • the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging message within the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging message in the N POs, it does not need to monitor the paging control information, but in the same way, for the access network device, the paging can still be sent in the N POs. control information.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate the monitoring of the paging message, and then a message including the identification of the terminal device can be sent in one or more POs among the N POs. paging message; and if the terminal device does not need to be paging, the first indication information can be used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored. In this way, the first indication information can not only indicate that the terminal equipment is sleeping within N POs, but also can indicate that the terminal equipment is awake within N POs, and the indication is more comprehensive.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the monitoring situation of terminal equipment in N POs.
  • N 2
  • the two POs include the PO where the paging control information is located, and the PO after the PO and the same as the PO.
  • the first adjacent PO Take the first adjacent PO as an example, wherein the horizontal axis of FIG. 6 represents time.
  • the oblique-lined rectangular box located in the PO represents the paging control information.
  • the terminal device receives paging control information in the first PO, the paging control information includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates monitoring paging.
  • the terminal device is in the PO where the paging control information is located (that is, the first one from left to right).
  • PO monitors the paging message, after receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device (for example, the ID of the terminal device), the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device can further establish with the access network device RRC connection, etc., or, if the paging message does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged; or, if the paging control information includes the first indication information but does not include the information used to schedule the paging message scheduling information, the terminal device does not monitor the paging message at the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device is determined to be scheduled in the PO where the paging control information is located (for example, the paging message includes the identifier of the terminal device). If the terminal device is determined to be scheduled in the PO where the paging control information is located (for example, the paging message includes the identifier of the terminal device), the terminal device does not need to monitor subsequent POs, but can communicate with the access network device.
  • the terminal device is in the The first PO (that is, the second PO from left to right) after the PO where the paging control information is located and adjacent to the PO monitors the paging control information, if the paging control information monitored in the PO is Including the scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device continues to monitor the paging message in the PO.
  • the terminal device After receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device (for example, the ID of the terminal device), the terminal device If the device is paged, the terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc., or, if the paging message does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged; or, if the terminal device is in a PO If the paging message monitored internally does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged; or, if the paging control information monitored by the terminal device in a PO does not include the scheduling information of the paging message, then the terminal device is not paging. There is no need to listen for paging messages within this PO.
  • the identification of the terminal device for example, the ID of the terminal device
  • the terminal device receives the paging control information in the third PO, the paging control information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates not to monitor paging. Then the terminal device does not monitor the paging message at the PO where the paging control information is located (ie, the third PO from left to right) and the first PO after the PO and adjacent to the PO (ie, the first PO from the left).
  • the fourth PO) from the right does not monitor paging control information.
  • the terminal device may not need to monitor the paging control information in some POs, for the access network device, the paging control information can still be sent in each of the N POs. 6
  • the paging control information is not drawn in each PO in order to represent the behavior of the terminal equipment, but it does not represent the behavior of the access network equipment.
  • the first indication information may affect the "sleep" of the terminal device within the N POs, but does not affect the "wake-up" of the terminal device within the N POs. Then, for example, if the first indication information indicates monitoring paging, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information in the PO where the paging control information is located. If the received paging control information includes the scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device can monitor the paging control information.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message in the PO, after receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc., Or if the paging message does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged, or if the paging control information does not include scheduling information of the paging message, the terminal device does not monitor the paging message in the PO. Or, if the first indication information indicates not to monitor the paging, the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging message in the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • the terminal equipment since the terminal equipment does not need to monitor the paging messages in the N POs, it does not need to monitor the paging control information, but for the access network device, the paging control information can still be sent in the N POs.
  • the first indication information indicates to monitor paging, then it is considered that the first indication information is not associated with N POs, and the terminal device only needs to monitor normally in the PO where the first indication information is located; If the indication information indicates not to monitor paging, it is considered that the first indication information is associated with N POs, and the terminal device does not need to monitor paging messages in the N POs associated with the first indication information.
  • the first indication information can be used to instruct to monitor the paging message, and then a paging message including the identification of the terminal device can be sent in the PO where the paging control information is located. ; and if the terminal device does not need to be paging, the first indication information can be used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored. In this way, the first indication information only indicates that the terminal device is sleeping within N POs, so as to achieve the purpose of saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the monitoring situation of the terminal equipment in N POs.
  • N 2
  • the two POs include the PO where the paging control information is located and the PO located after the PO in the time domain. And take the first PO adjacent to the PO as an example.
  • the oblique-lined rectangular box located in the PO represents the paging control information.
  • the terminal device receives paging control information in the first PO, the paging control information includes first indication information, and the first indication information indicates monitoring paging.
  • the terminal device is in the PO where the paging control information is located (that is, the first one from left to right).
  • PO monitors the paging message, after receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the identification of the terminal device (for example, the ID of the terminal device), the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device can further establish with the access network device RRC connection, etc., or, if the paging message does not include the identification of the terminal device, the terminal device is not paged; or, if the paging control information includes the first indication information but does not include the information used to schedule the paging message scheduling information, the terminal device does not monitor the paging message at the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the terminal device receives the paging control information in the second PO, the paging control information includes the first indication information, and the first indication information indicates not to monitor paging. Then the terminal device is at the PO where the paging control information is located (ie, the second PO from left to right) and the first PO adjacent to and after the PO in the time domain (ie, the first PO from the left). The third PO from the right does not listen to paging messages.
  • the terminal equipment may not need to monitor the paging control information in some POs, for the access network equipment, the paging control information can still be sent in each of the N POs.
  • the paging control information is drawn in the PO to represent the behavior of the terminal equipment, but it does not represent the behavior of the access network equipment.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a PO monitored by a terminal device after the method described in this embodiment of the present application is adopted, and the part drawn with slashes in FIG. 8 represents paging control information. For example, if the default period of the system is 1.28 seconds, and the dedicated paging period of the terminal equipment is 0.64 seconds, then the paging period actually applied by the terminal equipment is 0.64 seconds. If the terminal device monitors POs with a paging cycle of 0.64 seconds according to the current technology, the terminal device needs to monitor each PO in a paging cycle, as shown in the first row in FIG. 8 .
  • the default period of the system is 1.28 seconds
  • the dedicated paging period of the terminal equipment is also 1.28 seconds
  • the paging period actually applied by the terminal equipment is 1.28 seconds. If the terminal device monitors the PO with the paging cycle of 1.28 seconds according to the current technology, the terminal device needs to monitor each PO in a paging cycle in the same way, but because the paging cycle interval of 1.28 seconds is long, Compared with the paging cycle of 0.64 seconds, the number of POs that the terminal device needs to monitor is reduced by half, as shown in the second row in FIG. 8 .
  • the system default period is 1.28 seconds
  • the dedicated paging period of the terminal equipment is 2.56 seconds
  • the paging period actually applied by the terminal equipment is 1.28 seconds.
  • the paging period actually applied by the terminal equipment is smaller than that of the terminal equipment.
  • the paging cycle ie, dedicated paging cycle
  • the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application can be adopted, so that the indication information is associated with one or more POs. If the access network device does not page the terminal device, the indication information sent by the access network device can indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored. For example, in the third row in FIG.
  • the POs represented by the dotted rectangles refer to the POs that the terminal device does not need to monitor. It can be seen that the method provided by the embodiment of the present application reduces the number of POs monitored by the terminal device, and can reduce the power consumption of the terminal device without changing the rules for determining the paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the indication information may be associated with multiple paging occasions. If the indication information indicates that there is no need to monitor the paging (or, no need to monitor the paging message), the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging in the PO associated with the indication information. Phew, but can sleep. That is to say, even if the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is relatively small, the terminal device can monitor only a part of the POs in the paging cycle, and the remaining POs in the paging cycle do not need to monitor. Since the number of POs to be monitored is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the terminal device (such as a smart phone, smart watch or smart bracelet, etc.) has no communication services, such as in standby, the terminal device is still consuming battery power, for example, the terminal device will continue to perform RRC idle state or RRC inactive The paging function in the state, so the terminal equipment still has power consumption.
  • the power consumption caused by the terminal equipment using the paging function in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state can be reduced, thereby reducing the consumed battery power and prolonging the standby time of the terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method, through which the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the terminal device is in an RRC inactive state, for example, and the paging described in the following may be regarded as a paging initiated by the access network device.
  • the method is performed by the core network device, the access network device and the terminal device as an example.
  • the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal device sends the first information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the first information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may send the first information to the access network device during the random access procedure, for example, the first information may be carried in the third message (Msg3) or the message B (MsgB) of the random access procedure.
  • the terminal device may also send the first information to the access network device after the random access is completed, for example, the first information may be carried in an RRC message (eg, UE capability information message) or other types of messages.
  • RRC message eg, UE capability information message
  • the access network device sends the first message, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may indicate that the second function is enabled, or in other words, the first message may indicate that one piece of indication information from the access network device is associated with multiple POs of the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send the first message in a broadcast manner, or in other words, the first message may be a broadcast message.
  • the first message may be a system message, or the first message may also be another broadcast message other than the system message.
  • the first message may also be a unicast message, for example, the first message may be an RRC message (for example, an RRC release message for releasing the terminal device to an RRC inactive state, or other RRC messages) or a media access control (media access control message). access control, MAC) control element (control element, CE), etc.
  • the first message may further include a paging cycle actually applied by the access network device.
  • the terminal device determines the value of N, where N is the number of POs of the terminal device associated with one indication information. Wherein, if the terminal device receives the first message, and the first message indicates that the second function is enabled, or indicates that a piece of indication information from the access network device is associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, the terminal device may perform S24; or, If the terminal device does not receive the first message, or the received first message indicates that the second function cannot be enabled, or indicates that an indication from the access network device cannot be associated with multiple POs of the terminal device, or indicates that the access network device An indication information of the terminal device is associated with a PO of the terminal device, then the terminal device may not need to perform S24.
  • the terminal device may determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, the corresponding relationship between the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N, and the value of N determined by the terminal device For the method of the value, etc., reference may be made to the related introduction of S24 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . If the terminal device determines the value of N in this way, the access network device can also determine the value of N in the same way, and details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device may also determine the value of N in another manner.
  • the network device eg, the access network device
  • the terminal device sends the second message to the terminal device
  • the terminal device receives the second message from the access network device
  • the second message may indicate the value of N. It is equivalent to that the value of N can be determined by the access network device, and the value of N is notified to the terminal device, so the terminal device does not need to determine the value of N by itself.
  • the manner in which the access network device determines the value of N is similar to the manner in which the terminal device determines the value of N, and details are not repeated here.
  • the first message and the second message may be the same message, or may be different messages.
  • the core network device sends a notification message to the access network device, and the access network device receives the notification message from the core network device.
  • the notification message is used to indicate the arrival of downlink data from the terminal device.
  • the access network device sends the first indication information, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information from the access network device.
  • the terminal device determines the monitoring conditions of the N POs of the terminal device according to the first indication information.
  • the indication information may be associated with multiple paging occasions. If the indication information indicates that there is no need to monitor the paging (or, no need to monitor the paging message), the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging in the PO associated with the indication information. Phew, but can sleep. That is to say, even if the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is relatively small, the terminal device can monitor only a part of the POs in the paging cycle, and the remaining POs in the paging cycle do not need to monitor. Since the number of POs to be monitored is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be saved.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes that the group paging mechanism can be used to divide the terminal equipment into one or more groups, and the access network equipment can perform paging according to the group during paging, and the unpaging The terminal devices in the group do not need to receive paging messages, so as to reduce the power consumption of these terminal devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication method, through which group paging can be implemented, and the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in an RRC idle state, and the paging described in the following may be regarded as a paging initiated by the access network device.
  • the method is performed by the core network device, the access network device and the terminal device as an example.
  • the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the first terminal device described below may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the first terminal device sends the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the core network device, and the core network device receives the dedicated paging cycle from the first terminal device. In this way, the core network device obtains the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send the dedicated paging cycle to the core network device through a NAS message, such as a registration request message, or other NAS messages in the registration process, or a corresponding response after the registration is completed.
  • NAS messages such as a registration request message, or other NAS messages in the registration process, or a corresponding response after the registration is completed.
  • the core network device sends a paging message, such as a first paging message, to the access network device, and the access network device receives the first paging message from the core network device information.
  • a paging message such as a first paging message
  • the first paging message may include paging information, and may include a dedicated paging cycle for the first terminal device.
  • the access network device does not know the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device, so the core network device can send the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the access network device.
  • the access network device sends the second message, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the second message from the access network device.
  • terminal devices may be divided into different groups, and the division factors may include one or more.
  • a division factor is the paging cycle of the terminal device, and the paging cycle of the terminal device is, for example, the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or it can also be the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device, and the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device. It is the smaller of the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device and the default paging cycle of the system.
  • the paging cycle can be divided into one or more ranges, each of which corresponds to a group. If the paging cycle of a terminal device is located in one of the ranges, the terminal device belongs to the group corresponding to the range. .
  • another dividing factor is the ID of the terminal device.
  • the ID of the terminal device can be divided into one or more ranges, each of which corresponds to a group. If the paging cycle of a terminal device is within one of the ranges , the terminal device belongs to the group corresponding to the range.
  • another division factor is the value of N corresponding to the terminal device, for example, the terminal devices with the same value of N are divided into one group.
  • the division factors may also include multiple types.
  • the division factors may include the paging cycle of the terminal device and the ID of the terminal device. For example, the paging cycle of the terminal device is firstly divided into one or more ranges, some or all of which are in the range.
  • each range in the range one or more sub-ranges may be further divided according to the ID of the terminal device, and then each sub-range may correspond to a group.
  • the division factor includes the paging cycle of the terminal device and the value of N corresponding to the terminal device.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is first divided into one or more ranges, each of which is part of the range or the whole range.
  • one or more sub-ranges may be further divided according to the value of N corresponding to the terminal device, and then each sub-range may correspond to a group.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit other division factors and division manners.
  • the division rule information (or referred to as grouping rule information) can be specified by a protocol, and the terminal device can determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the protocol.
  • the grouping rule information may be pre-stored in the terminal device, and the terminal device may determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the pre-stored information.
  • the grouping rule information may also be configured by a network device (eg, an access network device).
  • the grouping rule information may include information of one or more groups, and the value range corresponding to each group in the one or more groups (for example, the value range of the paging cycle, or the values of other corresponding division factors. value range).
  • terminal devices when grouping terminal devices, different division factors may be used, and then under different division factors, terminal devices may have corresponding grouping methods.
  • the first terminal device for the first terminal device, according to the search
  • the paging cycle grouping is obviously different from the grouping according to the paging probability, and the grouping to which the first terminal device belongs is also different.
  • the second message may enable the terminal equipment to be grouped through the paging cycle, that is, the access network device may indicate through the second message to enable the method of grouping through the paging cycle, then the first terminal device can It is determined that the group to which the first terminal device belongs is the corresponding group in the case of grouping according to the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can send the second message to enable the End devices are grouped.
  • the second message is, for example, a broadcast message. After the first terminal device receives the second message, it can be determined that the terminal device can apply the method of grouping by the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can send a third message in addition to the second message to enable grouping the terminal devices through the paging cycle, and the third message can include Grouping rule information.
  • the group to which the first terminal device belongs can be determined according to the grouping rule information and a corresponding division factor (eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device).
  • a corresponding division factor eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device.
  • both the second message and the third message are broadcast messages, and there may be multiple terminal devices that can receive the second message and/or the third message.
  • the first terminal device is one of the second and third messages that has received the message. Terminal Equipment.
  • the access network device may also not need to use a special message to enable the method of grouping the terminal devices through the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can still send the second message, but the second message includes grouping rule information, which is equivalent to that, by sending the grouping rule information, the access network device implicitly instructs to enable the terminal equipment to be processed through the paging cycle. grouping method.
  • the group to which the first terminal device belongs can be determined according to the grouping rule information and a corresponding division factor (eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device).
  • the second message is, for example, a broadcast message, and there may be multiple terminal devices that can receive the second message.
  • the first terminal device is one of the terminal devices that has received the second message.
  • different groups may also correspond to different values of N.
  • the value of N corresponding to the first group is 1, indicating that for the terminal equipment in the first group, the indication information can be associated with one PO; for another example, the value corresponding to the second group is The value of N is 2, indicating that for the terminal device of the second group, the indication information can be associated with 2 POs, and so on.
  • the packet has a corresponding relationship with the value of N, and the corresponding relationship can be specified by a protocol, or the terminal device can store it in advance, or can also be configured by the access network device. If configured by the access network device, the correspondence may be included in the grouping rule information. If the access network device will send the grouping rule information, the corresponding relationship will be sent together.
  • the access network device sends the first message, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may include first grouping information, the first grouping information may indicate the first grouping, and the first grouping may include one or more terminal devices.
  • the first message may be DCI located before the first PO of a paging cycle, such as WUS.
  • the first message includes first group information, and the first group indicated by the first group information is the group to be paged, and the first terminal device can determine whether the first terminal device is paged according to the WUS. Since the WUS is sent before the PO, if the terminal device determines that it is not paged, the first terminal device does not need to monitor the PO associated with the WUS, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device to a greater extent.
  • the first message may also be paging control information.
  • the first message includes first group information, and the first group indicated by the first group information is the group to be paged, and the first terminal device can determine whether the first terminal device is paged according to the paging control information. If the first terminal device determines that it is not paged, the first terminal device does not need to continue to monitor the paging message in the PO where the paging control information is located, thereby saving power consumption of the terminal device.
  • terminal devices are grouped, so that the terminal devices can be paged in a grouping manner.
  • the first group indicated by the first group information represents the paged group.
  • the terminal device may not monitor the corresponding PO, which can reduce the number of terminals The false alarm probability of the device.
  • a paging cycle may be used to divide the grouping of terminal devices. For example, terminal devices with a larger paging cycle may be divided into a group, such as group 1, and terminal devices with a smaller paging cycle may be divided into groups.
  • group 2 it is called group 2, then if the network needs to page group 2, and the terminal equipment in group 1 knows that the network has not paged group 1 according to the grouping information from the network, the terminal equipment in group 1 does not need to respond. , but can continue to sleep, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal devices in group 1. It can be seen that the embodiments of the present application are grouped according to the paging cycle, which can better reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines whether the first terminal device belongs to the first group.
  • the terminal device can determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the protocol.
  • the grouping rule information may be pre-stored in the terminal device, and the terminal device may determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the pre-stored information.
  • the grouping rule information can also be configured by the access network device, and the access network device can send the grouping rule information, and the first terminal device can determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs after receiving the grouping rule information.
  • the first terminal device determines the group to which the first terminal device belongs, and the first terminal device also receives the first group information, the first terminal device can determine whether the group to which the first terminal device belongs is the first group.
  • the first terminal device belongs to the first group, continue to perform S106, and if the first terminal device does not belong to the first group, it is unnecessary to perform S106, and the process ends.
  • the first terminal device monitors the paging in the PO associated with the first message.
  • the first message may be DCI before the first PO of a paging cycle, eg WUS.
  • the PO associated with the first message may refer to one or more POs located after the WUS.
  • the one or more POs may be continuous POs or discontinuous POs in the time domain, and this one One or more POs may be located in one paging cycle, or may be located in multiple paging cycles.
  • the first terminal device can monitor the paging control information in one or more POs located after the WUS.
  • the access network device may perform paging in one or more POs associated with the first message. For example, if the first terminal device monitors paging control information in one of the POs, and the paging control information includes scheduling information for scheduling paging messages, the first terminal device may continue to monitor paging messages in the PO, After receiving the paging message, if the paging message includes the ID of the first terminal device, indicating that the first terminal device is paged, the first terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc.
  • the call message does not include the ID of the first terminal device, indicating that the first terminal device is not paged, then the first terminal device no longer monitors in the PO, and waits until the next PO associated with the WUS arrives to monitor; or , if the first terminal device monitors paging control information in one of the POs, but the paging control information does not include scheduling information for scheduling paging messages, indicating that the first terminal device is not paged, then the first terminal The device no longer monitors in the PO, and waits until the next PO associated with the WUS arrives to monitor.
  • the first message may also be paging control information.
  • the first message may be associated with one or more POs. If the first message is associated with one PO, this one, for example, refers to the PO where the paging control information is located; or, if the first message is associated with multiple POs, the number of POs
  • the POs may include the PO where the paging control information is located, and at least one PO that is located after the PO where the paging control information is located, or, the multiple POs associated with the first message may not include the paging control information.
  • the PO where the paging control information is located only includes at least one PO after the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the multiple POs may be continuous POs in the time domain, or may also be discontinuous POs, and the one or more POs may be located in a paging cycle, Alternatively, it may be within multiple paging cycles.
  • the PO associated with the first message refers to the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the first terminal device belongs to the first group, indicating that the group where the first terminal device is located is paged, the first terminal device can The paging message is monitored in the PO.
  • the access network device if the terminal device in the first group needs to be paged, the access network device can perform paging in one or more POs associated with the first message. .
  • the first terminal device After the first terminal device receives the paging message, if the paging message includes the ID of the first terminal device, indicating that the first terminal device is paged, the first terminal device can further establish an RRC connection with the access network device, etc., However, if the paging message does not include the ID of the first terminal device, indicating that the first terminal device has not been paged, the first terminal device will no longer monitor in the PO, and will monitor when the next PO arrives.
  • terminal devices are grouped, so that the terminal devices can be paged in a grouping manner.
  • the terminal device may not monitor the corresponding PO, which can reduce the number of terminals The false alarm probability of the device.
  • the paging cycle can be used to divide the grouping of the terminal equipment, and the grouping method is more reasonable, and the power consumption of the terminal equipment can be better reduced.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a fourth communication method, through which group paging can be implemented and the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the terminal device is in an RRC inactive state, for example, and the paging described in the following may be regarded as a paging initiated by the access network device.
  • the method is performed by the core network device, the access network device and the terminal device as an example.
  • the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the first terminal device described below may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the first terminal device sends the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the core network device, and the core network device receives the dedicated paging cycle from the first terminal device.
  • the core network device sends the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the access network device, and the access network device receives the dedicated paging cycle from the core network device.
  • the paging is performed by the access network equipment. Therefore, the access network equipment needs to know the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal equipment, so the core network equipment can The dedicated paging cycle is sent to the access network equipment.
  • the first terminal device sends the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the access network device, and the access network device receives the dedicated paging cycle from the first terminal device.
  • S111-S112 and S113 are two parallel schemes, and only one of them needs to be executed. That is, the first terminal device may send the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the core network device, and the core network device may send it to the access network device, or the first terminal device may directly send the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the core network device.
  • the paging cycle is sent to the access network device without forwarding by the core network device.
  • the first terminal device may send the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the access network device during the random access process.
  • the first terminal device may send the first terminal device through Msg3 or MsgB in the random access process.
  • the dedicated paging cycle of the device is sent to the access network device; alternatively, the first terminal device may also send the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device to the access network device after the random access is successful, for example, the first terminal device may The dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device is sent to the access network device through an RRC message or other types of messages.
  • the access network device sends the second message, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the second message from the access network device.
  • the access network device can send the second message to enable the End devices are grouped.
  • the second message is, for example, a broadcast message, or may also be a unicast message (eg, an RRC release message). After the first terminal device receives the second message, it can be determined that the terminal device can apply the method of grouping by the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can send a third message in addition to the second message to enable grouping the terminal devices through the paging cycle, and the third message can include Grouping rule information.
  • the group to which the first terminal device belongs can be determined according to the grouping rule information and a corresponding division factor (eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device).
  • the second message is, for example, a broadcast message, or a unicast message.
  • the third message is, for example, a broadcast message, or a unicast message.
  • the access network device may also not need to use a special message to enable the method of grouping the terminal devices through the paging cycle.
  • the access network device can still send the second message, but the second message includes grouping rule information, which is equivalent to that, by sending the grouping rule information, the access network device implicitly instructs to enable the terminal equipment to be processed through the paging cycle. grouping method.
  • the group to which the first terminal device belongs can be determined according to the grouping rule information and a corresponding division factor (eg, the paging cycle of the first terminal device).
  • the second message is, for example, a broadcast message, or a unicast message.
  • the access network device does not need to enable the method of grouping the terminal equipment through the paging cycle through a special message, nor does it need to send the grouping rule information to the terminal equipment.
  • the access network device may send a second message to the first terminal device, where the second message is a unicast message, and the second message may indicate a group to which the first terminal device belongs. That is, the access network device can determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs, and notify the first terminal device of the information of the group to which the first terminal device belongs, so that the first terminal device does not need to determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs.
  • the access network device indicates the group to which the first terminal device belongs, which is also equivalent to implicitly indicating a manner of enabling the grouping of the terminal device through the paging cycle. In this way, signaling overhead can be saved, and the workload of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • different groups may correspond to different values of N.
  • the value of N corresponding to the first group is 1, indicating that for the terminal equipment in the first group, the indication information can be associated with one PO; for another example, the value corresponding to the second group is The value of N is 2, indicating that for the terminal device of the second group, the indication information can be associated with 2 POs, and so on.
  • the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 when divided according to the paging cycle, the value of N corresponding to the first group is 1, indicating that for the terminal equipment in the first group, the indication information can be associated with one PO; for another example, the value corresponding to the second group is The value of N is 2, indicating that for the terminal device of the second group, the indication information can be associated with 2 POs, and so on.
  • this part of the content reference may be made to the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the packet has a corresponding relationship with the value of N, and the corresponding relationship can be specified by a protocol, or the terminal device can store it in advance, or can also be configured by the access network device. If configured by the access network device, the correspondence may be included in the grouping rule information. If the access network device will send the grouping rule information, the corresponding relationship will be sent together. Or, if the access network device does not send the grouping rule information, for example, the access network device sends a second message to the first terminal device, and the second message indicates the group to which the first terminal device belongs, then optionally, the second message also further The value of N corresponding to the group to which the first terminal device belongs may be indicated.
  • the core network device sends a notification message to the access network device, and the access network device receives the notification message from the core network device.
  • the notification message may indicate the arrival of downlink data of the first terminal device.
  • the access network device sends the first message, and correspondingly, the first terminal device receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may include first grouping information, the first grouping information may indicate the first grouping, and the first grouping may include one or more terminal devices.
  • the first terminal device determines whether the first terminal device belongs to the first group.
  • the terminal device can determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the protocol.
  • the grouping rule information may be pre-stored in the terminal device, and the terminal device may determine the group to which the terminal device belongs according to the pre-stored information.
  • the grouping rule information can also be configured by the access network device, and the access network device can send the grouping rule information, and the first terminal device can determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs after receiving the grouping rule information.
  • the access network device indicates the group to which the first terminal device belongs through the second message, and the first terminal device can determine the group to which the first terminal device belongs according to the second message.
  • the first terminal device determines the group to which the first terminal device belongs, and the first terminal device also receives the first group information, the first terminal device can determine whether the group to which the first terminal device belongs is the first group.
  • the first terminal device belongs to the first group, continue to perform S117, and if the first terminal device does not belong to the first group, it is unnecessary to perform S117, and the process ends.
  • the first terminal device monitors the paging in the PO associated with the first message.
  • terminal devices are grouped, so that the terminal devices can be paged in a grouping manner.
  • the terminal device may not monitor the corresponding PO, which can reduce the number of terminals The false alarm probability of the device.
  • the paging cycle can be used to divide the grouping of the terminal equipment, and the grouping method is more reasonable, and the power consumption of the terminal equipment can be better reduced.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 is, for example, a terminal device 1200 .
  • the terminal device 1200 can implement the functions of the terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a processing module 1210 and a transceiver module 1220 .
  • the terminal device 1200 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combined devices, components, etc., having the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may include a transmitter and/or a receiver, the transmitter may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, and the receiver may also include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit.
  • the transmitter and the receiver can be unified to form a transceiver, and the transceiver can realize the functions of the transmitter and the receiver, or the transmitter and the receiver can also be two functional modules deployed separately.
  • the processing module 1210 may include a processor, such as a baseband processor, and the baseband processor may include one or more central processing units (CPUs).
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1210 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be an input/output interface of a chip (eg, a baseband chip), and the processing module 1210 may be a processor of the chip system, which may include one or more central processing units.
  • processing module 1210 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a circuit component related to the processor, and the transceiver module 1220 may be implemented by a transceiver or a circuit component related to the transceiver.
  • the processing module 1210 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 except for the transceiving operations, such as S24 and S27, and/or other operations for supporting the techniques described herein process.
  • Transceiver module 1220 may be used to perform all receive and transmit operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, such as S21, S23, and S26, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • processing module 1210 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 except for the transceiving operations, such as S93 and S96, and/or for supporting the techniques described herein. other processes.
  • Transceiver module 1220 may be used to perform all receive and transmit operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , such as S91 , S92 and S95 , and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module and the receiving module may be a functional module, which is called the transceiver module 1220.
  • the transceiver module 1220 can perform both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1220 can be used to perform the implementation shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the module 1220 is a receiving module; alternatively, the sending module and the receiving module can also be two functional modules, the transceiver module 1220 can be regarded as a general term for these two functional modules, and the sending module is used to complete the sending operation, for example, the sending module can be used to execute In the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. All receiving operations performed by the terminal equipment in the embodiment shown in 9.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is configured to receive a first message from the network device, where the first message is used to indicate that one piece of indication information from the network device is associated with multiple paging occasions PO of the terminal device, and the indication information is used to Wake up the terminal device or not wake up the terminal device;
  • the processing module 1210 is used to determine the value of N, where N is the number of POs of the terminal device 1200 associated with one indication information, the value of N is related to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200, and N is a positive integer;
  • a transceiver module 1220 further configured to receive first indication information from the network device
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to determine the monitoring situation of the N POs of the terminal device 1200 according to the first indication information.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the value of N in the following manner:
  • a second message is received from the network device, where the second message is used to indicate the value of N.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200 in the following manner:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be a second value, and the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle.
  • the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, including:
  • the second value the dedicated paging cycle/the system default paging cycle.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200 in the following manner:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is greater than the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the second value;
  • the first value and the second value are both preconfigured values.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200 in the following manner:
  • the value of N is determined according to the value range to which the dedicated paging cycle belongs, wherein different value ranges correspond to different values of N, and the number of value ranges is greater than or equal to 3.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to receive a third message from the network device, where the third message is used to indicate the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200; or,
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to determine the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200 according to predefined information; or,
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to pre-store the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1200.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging message, or to instruct not to monitor the paging message, and the paging control information is used to schedule the paging message ;or,
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging, or to instruct not to monitor the paging.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the monitoring conditions of N POs of the terminal device 1200 according to the first indication information in the following manner :
  • the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging message, then, monitor the paging message from the network device in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO, the remaining Paging messages from the network device are monitored within the PO; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored, then, the paging message from the network device is not to be monitored in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO Paging messages from the network device are not monitored in the remaining POs of the .
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the processing module 1210 is configured to determine, according to the first indication information, the number of POs of the terminal device 1200 in the following manner. Monitoring situation:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate monitoring paging, then, monitoring paging control information in the N POs, or monitoring paging control information and paging messages in the N POs; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging is not to be monitored, then, the paging control information and/or the paging message are not to be monitored within the N POs.
  • the first indication information is included in the paging control information, and the processing module 1210 is configured to determine the monitoring conditions of N POs of the terminal device 1200 according to the first indication information in the following manner :
  • the first indication information is used to instruct to monitor the paging message, then, monitor the paging message from the network device in the current PO; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging message is not to be monitored, then, the paging message from the network device is not to be monitored in the current PO, and, in the N POs except the current PO Paging messages from the network device are not monitored in the remaining POs of the .
  • the first indication information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the processing module 1210 is configured to determine, according to the first indication information, the number of POs of the terminal device 1200 in the following manner. Monitoring situation:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate monitoring paging, then, monitoring the paging control information in the first PO after the downlink control information before the PO, or monitoring the paging control information and the paging message; or,
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the paging is not to be monitored, then, the paging control information and the paging message are not to be monitored within the N POs.
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to determine that the first indication information corresponds to a first group to which the terminal device 1200 belongs, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to send first information, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
  • the terminal device 1200 supports multiple POs of the terminal device 1200 associated with the indication information
  • a plurality of POs of the terminal device 1200 are requested to associate the indication information.
  • processing module 1210 and the transceiver module 1220 For specific functions that can be implemented by the processing module 1210 and the transceiver module 1220, reference may be made to the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 1300 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 is, for example, a network device 1300 .
  • the network device 1300 can implement the functions of the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the network device 1300 includes a processing module 1310 and a transceiver module 1320 . Regarding the implementation of the network device 1300, reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the terminal device 1200.
  • the processing module 1310 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 except for the transceiving operation, such as the operation of determining the value of N, and/or to support this document other procedures of the described techniques.
  • the transceiver module 1320 may be configured to perform all receiving operations and sending operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, such as S21-S23 and S25-S26, and/or to support the techniques described herein other processes.
  • the processing module 1310 may be configured to perform all operations except the transceiving operation performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as the operation of determining the value of N, and/or for supporting Other procedures for the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1320 may be configured to perform all receiving operations and sending operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S91-S92 and S94-S95, and/or to support the techniques described herein other processes.
  • transceiver module 1320 reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the transceiver module 1220.
  • the transceiver module 1320 is configured to send a first message, where the first message is used to indicate that one indication information from the network device is associated with multiple paging occasions PO of the terminal device, and the indication information is used to wake up the terminal device or do not wake up the terminal device;
  • the processing module 1310 is configured to determine the value of N, where N is the number of POs of the terminal equipment associated with an indication message, the value of N is related to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal equipment, and N is a positive integer ;
  • the transceiver module 1320 is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is associated with N POs.
  • the processing module 1310 is configured to determine the value of N in the following manner:
  • the value of N is determined according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the processing module 1310 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device in the following manner:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined as a second value, and the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle.
  • the second value is a value determined according to the dedicated paging cycle and the system default paging cycle, including:
  • the second value the dedicated paging cycle/the system default paging cycle.
  • the processing module 1310 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device in the following manner:
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the first value; or,
  • the dedicated paging cycle is less than or equal to the system default paging cycle, and N is determined to be the second value;
  • the first value and the second value are both preconfigured values.
  • the processing module 1310 is configured to determine the value of N according to the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device in the following manner:
  • the value of N is determined according to the value range to which the dedicated paging cycle belongs, wherein different value ranges correspond to different values, and the number of value ranges is greater than or equal to 3.
  • the transceiver module 1320 is further configured to send a third message, where the third message is used to indicate the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device; or,
  • the processing module 1310 is further configured to determine the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device according to predefined information; or,
  • the processing module 1310 is further configured to pre-store the corresponding relationship between the value of N and the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the first wake-up information is included in the paging control information, the first wake-up information is used to indicate monitoring of paging messages, or used to indicate not to monitor paging messages, and the paging control information is used to schedule paging messages ;or,
  • the first wake-up information is included in the downlink control information before the PO, and the first wake-up information is used to indicate monitoring of paging, or to indicate not to monitor paging.
  • the transceiver module 1320 is further configured to receive first information from the terminal device or the core network device, where the first information is used to indicate one or more of the following:
  • the terminal device Whether the terminal device supports multiple POs associated with the indication information of the terminal device;
  • a plurality of POs of the terminal device are requested to be associated with the indication information.
  • the first indication information corresponds to a first group to which the terminal device belongs, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices.
  • processing module 1310 and the transceiver module 1320 For specific functions that can be implemented by the processing module 1310 and the transceiver module 1320, reference may be made to the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 1400 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1400 is, for example, a terminal device 1400 .
  • the terminal device 1400 can implement the function of the first terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the terminal device 1400 includes a processing module 1410 and a transceiver module 1420 . Regarding the implementation of the terminal device 1400, reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the terminal device 1200.
  • the processing module 1410 may be configured to perform all operations except the transceiving operation performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S105, and/or other operations used to support the techniques described herein process.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be used to perform all receiving operations and sending operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S101, S103, S104 and S106, and/or to support the techniques described herein other processes.
  • the processing module 1410 may be configured to perform all operations except the transceiving operation performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S117, and/or for supporting the techniques described herein other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1420 can be used to perform all receiving operations and sending operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S111, S113, S114, S116 and S118, and/or to support the descriptions herein other processes of the technology.
  • transceiver module 1420 reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the transceiver module 1220.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is configured to receive a first message from an access network device, where the first message includes first grouping information, where the first grouping information is used to indicate a first group, and the first group includes one or more multiple terminal devices;
  • a processing module 1410 configured to determine that the terminal device 1400 belongs to the first group, wherein the first group is divided according to the paging cycle of the terminal device;
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to monitor paging in the PO associated with the first message.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device, wherein the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the first message is downlink control information located before the PO, and the transceiver module 1420 is configured to monitor paging in the PO associated with the first message in the following manner:
  • the paging control information is monitored in the PO associated with the downlink control information, or the paging control information and the paging message are monitored.
  • the first message is paging control information
  • the transceiver module 1420 is configured to monitor paging in the PO associated with the first message in the following manner:
  • the paging message is monitored in the PO where the paging control information is located.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to:
  • a second message is received from the access network device, the second message includes grouping rule information, the grouping rule information includes information of at least one group, and a page corresponding to each group in the at least one group the range of values for the period; or,
  • a second message is received from the access network device, where the second message is used to indicate the group to which the terminal device 1400 belongs.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to send the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device 1400 to the access network device or the core network device.
  • processing module 1410 and the transceiver module 1420 can implement, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 , and details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 1500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1500 is, for example, a network device 1500 .
  • the network device 1500 can implement the functions of the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the network device 1500 includes a processing module 1510 and a transceiver module 1520 . Regarding the implementation of the network device 1500, reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the terminal device 1200.
  • the processing module 1510 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 except for the transceiving operations, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1520 may be configured to perform all receive operations and transmit operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S102, S103, and S104, and/or other operations used to support the techniques described herein process.
  • the processing module 1510 may be configured to perform all operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 except for the transceiving operations, and/or to support other processes of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1520 may be configured to perform all receive operations and transmit operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S112, S113, S114, and S116, and/or to support the techniques described herein other processes.
  • transceiver module 1520 reference may be made to the introduction to the implementation of the transceiver module 1220.
  • the transceiver module 1520 is configured to send a first message, where the first message includes first group information, and the first group information is used to indicate a first group, and the first group includes one or more terminal devices;
  • a processing module 1510 configured to determine that the first terminal device belongs to the first group, wherein the first group is divided according to the paging cycle of the terminal device;
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to page the first terminal device in the PO associated with the first message.
  • the paging cycle of the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device, or the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device, wherein the paging cycle actually applied by the terminal device is the dedicated paging cycle of the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to:
  • the second message includes grouping rule information, where the grouping rule information includes information about at least one group and a value range of the paging cycle corresponding to each group in the at least one group; or ,
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to receive the dedicated paging cycle of the first terminal device from the first terminal device.
  • processing module 1510 and the transceiver module 1520 can implement, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 , and details are not repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus may be a terminal device or a circuit.
  • the communication apparatus may be configured to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in each of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device takes a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 16 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 16 . In an actual end device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit of the terminal device (the transceiver unit may be a functional unit, and the function unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function; alternatively, the transceiver unit may also be It includes two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of realizing a receiving function and a transmitting unit capable of realizing a transmitting function), and a processor with a processing function is regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 15 , the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1610 and a processing unit 1620 .
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, or the like.
  • the processing unit may also be referred to as a processor, a processing single board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1610 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 1610 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1610 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may also sometimes be referred to as a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit, or the like.
  • the transmitting unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
  • the transceiver unit 1610 is configured to execute the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9
  • the processing unit 1620 is configured to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 above.
  • the terminal device side performs all or part of other operations except the transceiving operation.
  • the transceiver unit 1610 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the first terminal device side in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11
  • the processing unit 1620 is configured to perform the implementation shown in FIG. 10 above.
  • the first terminal device side performs all or part of the operations except the transceiving operation.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be an integrated processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit.
  • the device may perform functions similar to the processing module 1210 in FIG. 12 .
  • the device may perform functions similar to the processing module 1410 in FIG. 14 .
  • the device includes a processor 1710, a transmit data processor 1720, and a receive data processor 1730.
  • the processing module 1210 in the above-mentioned embodiment may be the processor 1710 in FIG. 16 and perform corresponding functions;
  • the transceiver module 1220 in the above-mentioned embodiment may be the sending data processor 1720 in FIG. 16 and/or the receiving data processing Controller 1730, and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the processing module 1410 in the above embodiment may be the processor 1710 in FIG. 16 and perform corresponding functions; the transceiver module 1420 in the above embodiment may be the sending data processor 1720 in FIG. 16 and/or the receiving Data processor 1730, and perform corresponding functions.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 16 , it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a limitative description of this embodiment, but are only illustrative.
  • Fig. 18 shows another form of this embodiment.
  • the processing device 1800 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication apparatus in this embodiment may serve as a modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1803 and an interface 1804 .
  • the processor 1803 completes the functions of the above-mentioned processing module 1210
  • the interface 1804 implements the functions of the above-mentioned transceiver module 1220 .
  • the processor 1803 implements the functions of the above-mentioned processing module 1410
  • the interface 1804 implements the functions of the above-mentioned transceiver module 1420 .
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1806, a processor 1803, and a program stored in the memory 1806 and executable on the processor.
  • the processor 1803 executes the program, the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment is implemented.
  • Methods It should be noted that the memory 1806 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1800, as long as the memory 1806 can be connected to the The processor 1803 is sufficient.
  • the apparatus 1900 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1910 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU) 1920 .
  • the RRU 1910 may be referred to as a transceiver module, and the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module, or the transceiver module may be a module capable of transmitting and receiving functions.
  • the transceiver module may correspond to the transceiver module 1320 in FIG. 13 .
  • the transceiver module may correspond to the transceiver module 1520 in FIG. 15 .
  • the transceiver module may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 1911 and a radio frequency unit 1912 .
  • the RRU 1910 part is mainly used for receiving and transmitting radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending indication information to terminal equipment.
  • the BBU 1920 part is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and the like.
  • the RRU 1910 and the BBU 1920 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1920 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing module, which can correspond to the processing module 1310 in Figure 13, or can correspond to the processing module 1510 in Figure 15, and the BBU 1920 (processing module) is mainly used to complete the baseband. Processing functions such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to perform the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information and the like.
  • the BBU 1920 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may support a wireless access network of different access standards respectively. Radio access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the BBU 1920 also includes a memory 1921 and a processor 1922.
  • the memory 1921 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 1922 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to perform the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the memory 1921 and processor 1922 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a CPU, and may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASICs), off-the-shelf processors Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SCRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components
  • the memory storage module
  • memory described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the computer-readable medium may include random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory) read only memory, EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), universal serial bus flash disk (universal serial bus flash disk), removable hard disk, or other optical disk storage, disk storage A medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • universal serial bus flash disk universal serial bus flash disk
  • removable hard disk or other optical disk storage
  • disk storage A medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及一种通信方法及设备。终端设备从网络设备接收第一消息，第一消息用于指示一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备。终端设备确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关。终端设备从网络设备接收第一指示信息，并根据第一指示信息确定对终端设备的N个PO的监听情况。在本申请实施例中，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。

Description

一种通信方法及设备
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2020年07月14日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010674448.7、申请名称为“一种唤醒指示的方法、终端及网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中；本申请要求在2020年08月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010803120.0、申请名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及设备。
背景技术
第五代(5 generation，5G)新空口(new radio，NR)技术沿用了长期演进技术(long term evolution，LTE)中的非连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)机制，DRX机制包括DRX周期，终端设备会在一个DRX周期内“醒来”一段时间，在DRX周期中的其他时间，终端设备可以保持“休眠”状态，以降低功耗。终端设备处于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)空闲(idle)态或RRC非活跃(inactive)态时，若核心网设备或基站需要向终端设备发送下行数据(例如有电话需要呼入该终端设备，或者有数据需要传输给该终端设备)，会先向终端设备发送一条寻呼(paging)消息用于寻呼终端设备，终端设备收到该寻呼消息后，会发起RRC连接建立过程，从而可以接收下行数据。
在寻呼机制中，对于处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态的终端设备来说，DRX周期也就是寻呼周期。基站会广播一个小区公共的寻呼周期，称为默认寻呼周期(default paging cycle)，另外，终端设备可以确定一个终端设备特定的寻呼周期，称为UE专用寻呼周期(UE specific paging cycle)。现有的标准规定，终端设备真正使用的寻呼周期，是默认寻呼周期和UE专用寻呼周期中的较小值。UE专用寻呼周期一般是终端设备根据业务情况确定的，较为符合终端设备的实际工作情况。但是，即使终端设备根据终端设备的业务的时延需求确定了一个取值较大的UE专用寻呼周期，但由于默认寻呼周期较小，则终端设备仍然会使用默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际醒来的频率比终端设备所期望醒来的频率更快，不利于终端设备的节能。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及设备，用于减小终端设备的功耗。
第一方面，提供第一种通信方法，该方法包括：从网络设备接收第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的所述终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；从所述网络设备接收第一指示信息；根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N 个PO的监听情况。
该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。
所述的网络设备例如为接入网设备，或者为核心网设备，或者如果在以后的通信系统中接入网设备与核心网设备合并为同一设备，则所述网络设备可以是该设备。在本申请实施例中，指示信息可以关联多个寻呼时机，也就是说，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，确定N的取值，包括：
根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值；或，
从所述网络设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示N的取值。
终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间可以具有对应关系，则终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期确定N的取值。通过这种方式，终端设备可以自行确定N的取值，无需网络设备指示，能够减少信令交互，节省信令开销。或者，如果终端设备处于RRC非活跃态，则网络设备可以向终端设备发送单播消息，那么网络设备也可以通过第二消息将N的取值告知该终端设备，从而无需终端设备再确定N的取值，能够简化终端设备的实现，有利于将本申请实施例的技术方案应用于更多的能力较低的终端设备。
结合第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间可以具有对应关系，这是其中的一种对应关系。在这种对应关系中，终端设备只需根据专用寻呼周期与系统默认寻呼周期之间的大小关系，就能确定N的取值，方式较为简单。
结合第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期是较为符合终端设备的业务需求的。此时N的取值(即，第一值)例如为1，表明网络对终端设备的寻呼粒度细化到了每个PO，可以减小终端设备错过寻呼的概率。而如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是系统默认寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期比终端设备的业务所需求的周期要小。此时N可以根据专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期来确定，使得N的取值(即，第二值)既能够满足终端设备的业务需求，也能够尽量减小终端设备的功耗。
结合第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第四种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间可以具有对应关系，这是其中的另一种对应关系。如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期是较为符合终端设备的业务需求的。此时N可以为1，表明网络对终端设备的寻呼粒度细化到了每个PO，可以减小终端设备错过寻呼的概率。而如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是系统默认寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期比终端设备的业务所需求的周期要小。此时N可以为第二值，例如第二值大于第一值，则通过应用第二值，可以尽量减小终端设备的功耗。而且第一值和第二值都是预先配置的，无需终端设备自行计算，可以简化终端设备的实现。
结合第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第五种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同N的取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间可以具有对应关系，这是其中的又一种对应关系。在这种方式下，可以划分更多的范围，终端设备根据专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，可以确定N的取值。由于划分的取值范围可以较多较细，因此所确定的N的取值可以更为准确。
结合第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第五种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第六种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
从所述网络设备接收第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
预先存储N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
例如，终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系可以通过协议规定，那么终端设备可以根据预定义的信息来确定N的取值与终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或者，终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系可以预先存储在终端设备中；或者，终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置，并发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以发送第三消息，第三消息可以指示终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系，第三消息例如为广播消息或单播消息。总之，终端设备能够获得终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系，从而终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期来确定N的取值。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第六种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式中，
所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监 听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
在本申请的各个实施例中，监听寻呼，可以理解为监听PO，即，监听网络在PO中发送的消息，网络在PO中发送的消息例如包括寻呼控制信息，或者包括寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。例如，第一指示信息可以包括在一个寻呼周期的第一个PO之前的DCI中，该DCI例如为WUS。第一指示信息可以指示监听寻呼，或者指示不监听寻呼。WUS在时域上位于PO之前，如果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则终端设备在N个PO内都无需监听，从而能够在较大程度上节省终端设备的功耗。或者，第一指示信息也可以包括在寻呼控制信息中，例如在不发WUS的情况下，也可以通过寻呼控制信息来发送第一指示信息，使得第一指示信息能够正常发送。
结合第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第八种可选的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
如果第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，则第一指示信息关联的N个PO，可以包括该DCI所在的PO，以及包括位于该PO之后的连续的N-1个PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括该寻呼周期内的任意的N个PO，这N个PO在时域上可以连续也可以不连续，这N个PO中可以包括该DCI所在的PO，或者也可以不包括该DCI所在的PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括多个寻呼周期内的N个PO，这N个PO中可以包括该DCI所在的PO，或者也可以不包括该DCI所在的PO。以N个PO包括该DCI所在的PO为例，那么终端设备就可以按照第一指示信息的指示，在N个PO内监听寻呼消息或不监听寻呼消息。在这种方式下，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”和“唤醒”，即，第一指示信息既可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，也可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的唤醒，指示更为全面。
结合第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第九种可选的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和/或寻呼消息。
如果第一指示信息包括于在时域上位于PO之前的下行控制信息中，则第一指示信息关联的N个PO，可以包括从该WUS之后的第一个PO开始的连续的N个PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以是该寻呼周期内包括的任意的N个PO，这N个PO在时域上可以连续也可以不连续；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括多个寻呼周期内的N个PO。那么终端设备就可以按照第一指示信息的指示，在N个PO内监听寻 呼或不监听寻呼。在这种方式下，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”和“唤醒”，即，第一指示信息既可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，也可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的唤醒，指示更为全面。
结合第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第十种可选的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
还有一种方式，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”，但不影响终端设备在N个PO内的“唤醒”。那么，例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼消息，则终端设备可以在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO内监听寻呼控制信息，如果接收的寻呼控制信息包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内监听寻呼消息，在接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备被寻呼，该终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼消息，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都不用监听寻呼消息。相当于，如果第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，那么视为第一指示信息与N个PO没有关联关系，终端设备只需正常在第一指示信息所在的PO内监听即可；而如果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则视为第一指示信息与N个PO有关联关系，终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都不用监听寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息仅指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，达到节省终端设备的功耗的目的。
结合第一方面的第七种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第十一种可选的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述PO之前的下行控制信息之后的第一个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
这也是第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”，但不影响终端设备在N个PO内的“唤醒”的方式。例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，则终端设备可以在该WUS之后的第一个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或者监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或者，第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都既不用监听寻呼控制信息也不用监听寻呼消息。相当于，如果第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，那么视为第一指示信息与N个PO没有关联关系，终端设备只需正常在位于第一指示信息之后的PO内监听即可；而如果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则视为第一指示信息与N个PO有关联关系，终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都既不用监听寻呼控制信息也不用监听寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息仅指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，达到节省终端设备的功耗的目的。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第十一种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第十二种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
确定所述第一指示信息对应于所述终端设备所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
在本申请实施例中，可以将终端设备划分为不同的分组，划分因素可以包括一种或多种。例如一种划分因素为终端设备的寻呼周期，终端设备的寻呼周期例如为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者也可以是终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期是终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。那么，可以将寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的每个范围就对应一个分组，如果一个终端设备的寻呼周期位于其中一个范围内，则该终端设备就属于该范围对应的分组。在将终端设备划分为一个或多个分组后，可以令这一个或多个分组中的每个分组对应一种指示信息。通过将终端设备进行分组，从而在通过指示信息进行指示时可以通过分组的方式指示，对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定指示信息不对应于该终端设备所属的分组，则该终端设备可以不对该指示信息进行响应，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。而且，通过寻呼周期来划分终端设备所属的分组，能够使得划分结果更为合理，能够减小终端设备的功耗。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第一方面的第十二种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第十三种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息；
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO；
节能需求；或，
请求将所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO。
终端设备可以通过第一信息将终端设备的能力或终端设备的需求告知核心网设备，从而使得后续网络对于终端设备的寻呼方式能够尽量符合终端设备的能力或需求。
第二方面，提供第二种通信方法，该方法包括：发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的所述终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息关联N个PO。
该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第二通信装置是网络设备为例。示例性地，所述网络设备为接入网设备，例如基站。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，确定N的取值，包括：
根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值。
结合第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
结合第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
结合第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
结合第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式中，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
结合第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第六种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
预先存储N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第六种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第七种可选的实施方式中，
所述第一唤醒信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
所述第一唤醒信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第七种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第八种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
从终端设备或核心网设备接收第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息；
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO；
节能需求；或，
请求将所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第二方面的第八种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第九种可选的实施方式中，所述第一指示信息对应于所述终端设备所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
关于第二方面或第二方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第一 方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第三方面，提供第三种通信方法，该方法包括：从接入网设备接收第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一分组信息，所述第一分组信息用于指示第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备；确定所述第一终端设备属于所述第一分组，其中，所述第一分组是按照终端设备的寻呼周期划分的；在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼。
该方法可由第三通信装置执行，第三通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第三通信装置是终端设备为例，例如该终端设备为第一终端设备。
本申请实施例将终端设备进行分组，从而可以采用分组方式寻呼终端设备。对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定来自接入网设备的分组信息(例如第一分组信息)不是该终端设备所属的分组的信息，则该终端设备可以不在相应的PO监听，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。而且本申请实施例可以采用寻呼周期来划分终端设备的分组，分组方式更为合理，可以更好地减小终端设备的功耗。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，终端设备的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者为终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，其中，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。
在将终端设备按照寻呼周期进行分组时，该寻呼周期可以是指终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者也可以是指终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，具体的不作限制。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第三方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，所述第一消息为位于PO之前的下行控制信息，在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼，包括：
在所述下行控制信息所关联的PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
第一消息可以是位于一个寻呼周期的第一个PO之前的DCI，例如为WUS。那么，第一消息关联的PO，可以是指位于该WUS之后的一个或多个PO，这一个或多个PO在时域上可以是连续的PO，也可以是不连续的PO，且这一个或多个PO可以位于一个寻呼周期内，或者也可以位于多个寻呼周期内。那么，如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，表明第一终端设备所在的分组被寻呼，则第一终端设备就可以在位于该WUS之后的一个或多个PO内监听寻呼控制信息。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第三方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，所述第一消息为寻呼控制信息，在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼，包括：
在所述寻呼控制信息所在的PO内监听寻呼消息。
第一消息也可以是寻呼控制信息。那么，第一消息可以关联一个或多个PO，如果第一消息关联一个PO，则这一个例如为指该寻呼控制信息所在的PO；或者，如果第一消息关联多个PO，则这多个PO可以包括该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，以及包括位于该寻呼控制信息所在的PO之后的至少一个PO，或者，第一消息关联的多个PO中也可以不包括该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，而是只包括位于该寻呼控制信息所在的PO之后的至少一个PO。其中，第一消息如果关联多个PO，则这多个PO在时域上可以是连续的PO，或者也可以 是不连续的PO，且这一个或多个PO可以位于一个寻呼周期内，或者也可以位于多个寻呼周期内。例如第一消息关联的PO是指该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，那么，如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，表明第一终端设备所在的分组被寻呼，则第一终端设备就可以在该PO内监听寻呼消息。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第三方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第三方面的第四种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组；或，
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息包括分组规则信息，所述分组规则信息包括至少一个分组的信息，以及所述至少一个分组中的每个分组所对应的寻呼周期的取值范围；或，
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的分组。
在对终端设备进行分组时，可以采用不同的划分因素，那么在不同的划分因素下，终端设备可以分别有相应的分组方式，例如对于第一终端设备来说，按照寻呼周期分组，和按照寻呼概率分组，显然分组方式是不同的，第一终端设备所属的分组也是不同的。为此，第二消息可以使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组，即，接入网设备可以通过第二消息来指示使能通过寻呼周期进行分组的方式，则第一终端设备就可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组是按照寻呼周期进行分组的情况下所对应的分组。
或者，如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备也可以不必通过专门的消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。例如接入网设备还是可以发送第二消息，但第二消息包括分组规则信息，相当于，接入网设备通过发送分组规则信息，也就隐含指示了使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后，根据分组规则信息和相应的划分因素(例如第一终端设备的寻呼周期)，就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。
或者，如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备可以不必通过专门的消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式，也可以不必将分组规则信息发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以向第一终端设备发送第二消息，此时的第二消息为单播消息，第二消息可以指示第一终端设备所属的分组。即，接入网设备可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组，并将第一终端设备所属的分组的信息告知第一终端设备，从而第一终端设备无需自行确定第一终端设备所属的分组。而且，接入网设备指示了第一终端设备所属的分组，也相当于隐含指示了使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。通过这种方式，能够节省信令开销，且减小了终端设备的工作量。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可选的实施方式至第三方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可选的实施方式，在第三方面的第五种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
向所述接入网设备或核心网设备发送所述第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期。
例如第一终端设备可以通过NAS消息向核心网设备发送该专用寻呼周期，该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是注册过程中的其他NAS消息，或者也可以是注册 完成之后的相应的NAS消息。
第四方面，提供第四种通信方法，该方法包括：发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一分组信息，所述第一分组信息用于指示第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备；确定第一终端设备属于所述第一分组，其中，所述第一分组是按照终端设备的寻呼周期划分的；在所述第一消息关联的PO内寻呼所述第一终端设备。
该方法可由第四通信装置执行，第四通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第四通信装置是网络设备为例。示例性地，所述网络设备为接入网设备，例如基站。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，终端设备的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者为终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，其中，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第四方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
发送第二消息，所述第二消息用于使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组；或，
发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括分组规则信息，所述分组规则信息包括至少一个分组的信息，以及所述至少一个分组中的每个分组所对应的寻呼周期的取值范围；或，
向所述第一终端设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的分组。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可选的实施方式或第四方面的第二种可选的实施方式，在第四方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
从所述第一终端设备接收所述第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期。
关于第四方面或第四方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第三方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第五方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第一通信装置；或，所述通信装置用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第三通信装置。具体地，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块；或者，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果所述通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果所述通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设 备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第六方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第二通信装置；或，所述通信装置用于执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第四通信装置。具体地，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块；或者，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第四方面或第四方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为接入网设备，例如基站。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果所述通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果所述通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第七方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，所述通信装置还可以包括一个或多个存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第一通信装置；或，用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第三通信装置。或者，所述通信装置也可以不包括存储器，至少一个存储器可以位于所述通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，或用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，所述通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使得所述通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法，或使得所述通信装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中，如果通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第八方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可 以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，所述通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第二通信装置；或，用于实现上述第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，例如所述通信装置为前文所述的第四通信装置。或者，所述通信装置也可以不包括存储器，一个或多个存储器可以位于所述通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法，或用于实现上述第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，所述通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使得第二通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法，或使得所述通信装置执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为接入网设备，例如基站。
其中，如果通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第九方面，提供一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第五方面所述的通信装置或第七方面所述的通信装置，以及包括第六方面所述的通信装置或第八方面所述的通信装置。
第十方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十二方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十三方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
在本申请实施例中，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监 听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图；
图3为WUS和PO之间的时域位置关系的一种示意图；
图4为本申请实施例中终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的一种示意图；
图5为本申请实施例中终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的另一种示意图；
图6为本申请实施例中终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的又一种示意图；
图7为本申请实施例中终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的再一种示意图；
图8为采用本申请实施例所述的方法后终端设备监听的PO的一种示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信方法的流程图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法的流程图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的一种示意性框图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的一种示意性框图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的另一种示意性框图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的另一种示意性框图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种示意性框图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一示意性框图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)终端设备，包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，具体的，包括向用户提供语音的设备，或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备，或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与核心网进行通信，与RAN交换语音或数据，或与RAN交互语音和数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications，M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things，IoT)终端设备、签约单元(subscriber unit)、签约站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point，AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如，可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)，具有移 动终端设备的计算机，便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如，个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备，例如功耗较低的设备，或存储能力有限的设备，或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification，RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。
而如上介绍的各种终端设备，如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)，都可以认为是车载终端设备，车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit，OBU)。
本申请实施例中，终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为，能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。
本申请实施例中，用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备，也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
2)网络设备，例如包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，例如基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备，或者例如，一种车到一切(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)技术中的网络设备为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与IP分组进行相互转换，作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体，可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以包括LTE系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation，5G)NR系统(也简称为NR系统)中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network，Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，本申请实施例并不限定。
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备，在本申请实施例中，核心网设备例如包括5G系统中的访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)或用户平面功能(user plane function，UPF)等，或者包括4G系统中的移动管理实体(mobility management entity，MME)等。
本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片系统，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
3)DRX，简单来说，在DRX机制下，终端设备可以周期性地进入睡眠状态，不需要监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)。
4)RRC状态，终端设备有3种RRC状态：RRC连接(connected)态、RRC空闲态和RRC非激活态。
RRC连接态(或，也可以简称为连接态。在本文中，“连接态”和“RRC连接态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备与网络建立了RRC连接，可以进行数据传输。
RRC空闲态(或，也可以简称为空闲态。在本文中，“空闲态”和“RRC空闲态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备没有与网络建立RRC连接，基站没有存储该终端设备的上下文。如果终端设备需要从RRC空闲态进入RRC连接态，则需要发起RRC连接建立过程。
RRC非活跃态(或，也可称为RRC非激活态，或简称为非活跃态或非激活态。在本文中，“去活动态”、“非活跃态”、“去活跃态”、“去激活态”、“非激活态”、“RRC非激活态”或“RRC去激活态”等，是同一概念，这几种称呼可以互换)：终端设备之前在锚点基站进入了RRC连接态，然后锚点基站释放了该RRC连接，但是锚点基站保存了该终端设备的上下文。如果该终端设备需要从RRC非活跃态再次进入RRC连接态，则需要在当前驻留的基站发起RRC连接恢复过程(或者称为RRC连接重建立过程)。因为终端设备可能处于移动状态，因此终端设备当前驻留的基站与终端设备的锚点基站可能是同一基站，也可能是不同的基站。RRC恢复过程相对于RRC建立过程来说，时延更短，信令开销更小。但是基站需要保存终端设备的上下文，会占用基站的存储开销。
5)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a和b和c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的大小、内容、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如，第一值和第二值，可能相同，也可能不同。称为“第一”、“第二”，只是为了便于描述，而并不是表示这两个特征的取值、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。
前文介绍了本申请实施例所涉及到的一些名词概念，下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。
5G NR技术沿用了LTE系统中的DRX机制。DRX机制包括DRX周期，处于RRC连接态的终端设备在DRX周期内会周期性地“醒来”一段时间，终端设备“醒来”的时间称为持续(on duration)时间段，在DRX周期中除on duration时间段之外的其他时间，终端设备可以保持“休眠”状态，以降低功耗。另外，终端设备在处于RRC空闲态或RRC 非活跃态时，若核心网设备或基站需要向终端设备发送下行数据，例如有电话需要呼入该终端设备，或者有下行数据需要发送给该终端设备，则核心网或基站会先向终端设备发送寻呼消息，用于寻呼终端设备。终端设备收到寻呼消息后，会发起RRC连接建立过程从而接收下行数据。其中，寻呼机制还可以具体分为核心网(core network，CN)寻呼和无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)寻呼，对于RRC空闲态终端设备来说，对应的寻呼机制为CN寻呼，对于RRC非活跃态终端设备来说，对应的寻呼机制为RAN寻呼。
处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态的终端设备，只在自己的寻呼时机(paging occasion，PO)“醒来”接收寻呼消息。终端设备在该终端设备的PO，首先接收用于指示寻呼消息的下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，该DCI也可以称为寻呼控制信息，用于指示发送寻呼消息的时频资源位置。在接收寻呼控制信息之后，终端设备根据寻呼控制信息的调度，接收寻呼消息(paging message)。若寻呼消息携带了该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的身份号(ID))，则表示该终端设备被寻呼，该终端设备需要发起RRC连接建立过程接入基站；或者，如果寻呼消息未携带该终端设备的ID，则表示该终端设备未被寻呼，该终端设备可以继续“休眠”，等到下一个PO再“醒来”监听寻呼控制信息。其中，寻呼控制信息在物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)上传输，寻呼消息在物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)上传输。
在寻呼机制中，对于处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态的终端设备来说，DRX周期也就是寻呼周期。基站会广播小区公共的寻呼周期，称为默认寻呼周期(default paging cycle)，另外，终端设备可以确定终端设备特定的寻呼周期，称为UE专用寻呼周期(UE specific paging cycle)。现有标准中定义的寻呼周期值包括0.32s，0.64s，1.28s，2.56s，即，UE专用寻呼周期可以是这几个取值中的一个，默认寻呼周期也可以是这几个取值中的一个。现有的标准规定，终端设备真正使用的寻呼周期，是默认寻呼周期和UE专用寻呼周期中的较小值。UE专用寻呼周期一般是终端设备根据业务情况确定的，较为符合终端设备的实际工作情况。但是，即使终端设备根据终端设备的业务的时延需求确定了一个取值较大的UE专用寻呼周期(例如2.56s)，但由于默认寻呼周期较小(例如1.28s)，则终端设备仍然会使用默认寻呼周期(例如1.28s)，则终端设备实际醒来的频率比终端设备所期望醒来的频率更快，不利于终端设备的节能。
为解决上述问题，考虑引入新的寻呼周期的确定规则，例如：
规则1、终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期为UE专用寻呼周期；
规则2、终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期为默认寻呼周期和UE专用寻呼周期中的较大值；
规则3、终端设备和网络协商确定终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期值。
无论选择如上三种规则中的那种，都是改变了现有标准机制中寻呼周期的确定规则，导致终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期可能会大于默认寻呼周期，此时会影响网络中系统信息变更的机制，对网络的影响较大。在LTE系统中定义了系统信息的变更周期(modification period，MP)这一概念，系统信息可能会在一个MP内被传输多次，但在同一MP内，系统信息(例如包括了寻呼配置的系统信息)的内容不会发生变化。当基站想要修改系统信息中的某些系统信息时，基站会先在一个MP内通过寻呼消息通知终端设备，系统信息即将发生变化(但在当前MP内基站并不发送和使用新的系统信息)，在下一个MP开始的边界处，基站会使用新的系统信息，在下一个MP内，基站会发送新的系统信息。在现有标 准机制中，MP与默认寻呼周期有关联关系，基站需要保证在一个MP中每个终端设备的PO都必须至少出现一次，用于通知系统信息的变更情况。那么，如果终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期可能出现大于默认寻呼周期的情况，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期很可能会大于MP，那么在一个MP内，很可能该终端设备的PO一次都不会出现，这会影响系统信息变更的机制，导致网络无法向该终端设备通知系统信息的变更情况。
为此，目前依然考虑继续沿用寻呼周期的原有确定规则。但根据前文的分析可知，按照原有的确定规则，很可能导致终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期小于终端设备实际需要的寻呼周期，不利于终端设备的节能。
鉴于此，提供本申请实施例的技术方案。在本申请实施例中，可以继续沿用寻呼周期的原有确定规则，以减小对网络的影响，更好地与已有技术兼容。但在本申请实施例中，指示信息可以关联多个寻呼时机，也就是说，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation，4G)系统中，例如LTE系统，或可以5G系统中，例如NR系统，或者还可以应用于下一代移动通信系统或其他类似的通信系统，具体的不做限制。
请参见图1，为本申请实施例的一种应用场景。图1包括接入网设备、核心网设备和终端设备。例如终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态。如果终端设备处于RRC非活跃态，则接入网设备可以寻呼该终端设备，如果终端设备处于RRC空闲态，则核心网设备可以寻呼该终端设备。
该接入网设备和核心网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信系统陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)系统中，或者工作在NR系统中，或者工作在下一代通信系统或其他通信系统中。
图1中的核心网设备例如为4G系统中的MME，或者为5G系统中的AMF，或者也可以是下一代通信系统或其他通信系统中的相应的核心网设备。
图1中的接入网设备例如为基站。其中，接入网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备，例如在4G系统中可以对应eNB，在5G系统中对应5G中的接入网设备，例如gNB。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信系统中，因此图1中的接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信系统中的网络设备。图1以接入网设备是基站为例，实际上参考前文的介绍，接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。另外，图1中的终端设备以手机为例，实际上根据前文对于终端设备的介绍可知，本申请实施例的终端设备不限于手机。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。在本申请的各个实施例中，监听寻呼，可以理解为监听PO，即，监听网络在PO中发送的消息，网络在PO中发送的消息例如包括寻呼控制信息，或者包括寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
本申请实施例提供第一种通信方法，通过该方法，可以减小终端设备的功耗。请参见图2，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图1所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC空闲态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是核心网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图1所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的核心网设备 可以是图1所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S21、终端设备向核心网设备发送第一信息，核心网设备接收来自终端设备的第一信息。
第一信息可以指示如下的一项或多项：终端设备是否支持指示信息，终端设备是否支持指示信息关联该终端设备的一个或多个PO，节能需求，或，请求将指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO。例如，第一信息可以指示终端设备支持指示信息或不支持指示信息；或者，第一信息可以指示终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的一个PO，或者指示终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO；或者，第一信息可以指示终端设备有节能需求；或者，第一信息可以请求将指示信息关联终端设备的一个或多个PO；或者，第一信息可以指示终端设备是否支持指示信息，以及指示终端设备是否支持指示信息关联该终端设备的一个或多个PO，等等。
指示信息可以由网络设备发送，该网络设备例如为接入网设备，或者为核心网设备，或者在未来的通信系统中接入网设备与核心网设备可能合并为同一网络设备，则该网络设备可以是指该网络设备。例如指示信息可以唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备。关于指示信息的更多内容，将在后文介绍。
例如，将终端设备支持指示信息的功能称为第一功能，以及，将终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO的功能称为第二功能。终端设备一般都能够支持指示信息关联该终端设备的一个PO，因此该功能在此不多讨论。那么，第一功能和第二功能可以具有关联关系，即，支持第一功能也就表明支持第二功能，或者支持第二功能也就表明支持第一功能；同理，不支持第一功能也就表明不支持第二功能，或者不支持第二功能也就表明不支持第一功能。如果是这种情况，则第一信息可以指示终端设备是否支持指示信息，如果第一信息指示终端设备支持指示信息，也就隐含指示了终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO，而如果第一信息指示终端设备不支持指示信息，也就隐含指示了终端设备不支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO；或者，第一信息可以指示终端设备是否支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO，如果第一信息指示终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO，则也就隐含指示了终端设备支持指示信息，而如果第一信息指示终端设备不支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO，则也就隐含指示了终端设备不支持指示信息。即，第一信息只需指示终端设备是否支持一种功能(第一功能或第二功能)即可，无需指示过多内容，有助于节省信令开销。
或者，第一功能和第二功能也可以不具有关联关系。如果是这种情况，则第一信息对于第一功能和第二功能可以分别指示。例如，第一信息可以指示终端设备是否支持指示信息，或者，指示终端设备是否支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO，或者，指示终端设备是否支持指示信息，以及指示终端设备是否支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO。这样可以将不同的功能分别指示，使得指示更为明确，也可以将两种功能解耦，便于分别控制。其中，如果第一功能和第二功能不具有关联关系，那么有可能出现一种情况，终端设备支持第一功能，但不支持第二功能，如果是这种情况，则终端设备支持指示信息，可以表明终端设备支持指示信息关联该终端设备的一个PO，但由于终端设备不支持第二功能，因此终端设备不支持指示信息关联该终端设备的多个PO。但如果终端设备支持第二 功能，则终端设备也应该支持第一功能。
例如，终端设备可以将第一信息携带在非接入层(non-access stratum，NAS)消息中发送给核心网设备，该NAS消息例如为注册请求(registeration request)消息，或者也可以是注册过程中的其他NAS消息，或者是注册完成后的其他NAS消息。
S22、核心网设备将第一信息发送给接入网设备，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一信息。
可能有多个终端设备都可以向核心网设备发送第一信息，S21～S22相当于描述了其中一个终端设备的情况。
或者，S21～S22也可以替换为，终端设备向接入网设备发送第一信息，接入网设备接收来自终端设备的第一信息。例如终端设备可以在随机接入过程中向接入网设备发送第一信息，例如可将第一信息携带在随机接入过程中的第三消息(Msg3)中发送给接入网设备；或者，终端设备也可以在随机接入成功后向接入网设备发送第一信息，例如可将第一信息携带在RRC消息(例如，UE能力信息消息)中发送给接入网设备。可选的，接入网设备接收第一信息后，可以将第一信息发送给核心网设备。同理，也可能有多个终端设备都可以向接入网设备发送第一信息，这里相当于描述了其中一个终端设备的情况。
或者，S21～S22可以不必执行，也不必替换为其他步骤，即，终端设备不发送第一信息，接入网设备和核心网设备也不会接收该第一信息。可见，S21～S22是可选的步骤，在图2中用虚线表示。
S23、接入网设备发送第一消息，相应的，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以指示使能第二功能，或者说，第一消息可以指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO。
例如，接入网设备获得了一个或多个终端设备的第一信息，则接入网设备可以根据这一个或多个终端设备的第一信息，以及结合其他相应的因素，确定是否使能第二功能。结合终端设备的第一信息确定是否使能第二功能，可以使得接入网设备的确定结果尽量与终端设备的需求一致。例如，接入网设备获得的第一信息中，有一半以上的第一信息都指示相应的终端设备支持第二功能，则接入网设备可以使能第二功能，而如果接入网设备获得的第一信息中，有一半以上的第一信息都指示相应的终端设备不支持第二功能，则接入网设备可以不使能第二功能。如果接入网设备不使能第二功能，则接入网设备可以不发送第一消息，即，不执行S23；或者，如果接入网设备不使能第二功能，则接入网设备也可以发送第一消息，但此时的第一消息指示不使能第二功能，或者，第一消息指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不能关联终端设备的多个PO，或者，第一消息指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的一个PO。
或者，接入网设备未获得终端设备的第一信息，则接入网设备也可以根据接入网设备的相关策略确定是否使能第二功能。如果确定使能第二功能，则接入网设备发送第一消息，如果确定不使能第二功能，则接入网设备可以不发送第一消息，即，不执行S23；或者，如果接入网设备不使能第二功能，则接入网设备也可以发送第一消息，但此时的第一消息指示不使能第二功能，或者，第一消息指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不能关联终端设备的多个PO，或者，第一消息指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的一个PO。
例如，接入网设备可以通过广播方式发送第一消息，或者说，第一消息可以是广播消 息。例如第一消息可以是系统消息(system information)，或者第一消息也可以是除系统消息外的其他的广播消息。
或者，可能接入网设备和终端设备已经预先协商好，终端设备可以使能第二功能，或者，协议规定终端设备可以使能第二功能，则接入网设备可以不发送第一消息，即，S23也可以不执行。因此，S23是可选的步骤，在图2中用虚线表示。
作为第一消息的一种可选的实施方式，第一消息包括1比特的字段，如果该1比特的字段存在或包括在第一消息中，则表示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO，如果该1比特的字段不存在或不包括在第一消息中，则表示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不关联终端设备的多个PO。
作为第一消息的另一种可选的实施方式，第一消息包括1比特的字段，如果该1比特的字段的取值为“1”，则表示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO，如果该1比特的字段的取值为“0”，则表示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不关联终端设备的多个PO。
S24、终端设备确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的该终端设备的PO的个数。其中，如果终端设备接收了第一消息，且第一消息指示使能第二功能，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO，则终端设备可以执行S24；或者，如果终端设备未接收第一消息，或者接收的第一消息指示不使能第二功能，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不能关联终端设备的多个PO，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的一个PO，那么终端设备可以不必执行S24。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期确定N的取值。终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间可以具有对应关系，该对应关系可以有不同的实现方式，下面举例介绍。
1、对应关系的第一种实现方式。
对应关系的第一种实现关系为：终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，N为第一值；或，终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，N为第二值。
例如，第一值为1，或者也可以是其他取值，只要第一值是正整数即可；第二值可以是根据专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，第二值也是正整数。例如，第二值大于第一值，或者，对于第一值和第二值的大小关系不做限制。
例如，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，系统默认寻呼周期(即，接入网设备通过广播指示的默认寻呼周期)为2.56s，则N为第一值，例如N为1，表明一个指示信息关联一个PO。又例如，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，系统默认寻呼周期(即，接入网设备通过广播指示的默认寻呼周期)为0.64s，则N为第二值。例如，第二值＝专用寻呼周期/系统默认寻呼周期，则此时第二值＝2，即，一个指示信息关联两个PO。其中，这里的“/”表示相除的关系，即，第二值等于专用寻呼周期除以系统默认寻呼周期所得到的值。
如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期是较为符合终端设备的业务需求的。此时N可以为1，表明网络对终端设备的寻呼粒度细化到了每个PO，可以减小终端设备错过寻呼的概率。而如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是系统默认寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期比终端设备的业务所需求的周期要小。此时N可以根据专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻 呼周期来确定，使得N的取值(即，第二值)既能够满足终端设备的业务需求，也能够尽量减小终端设备的功耗。
例如，对应关系的第一种实现方式可以通过协议规定，那么终端设备可以根据预定义的信息来确定N的取值与终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或者，对应关系的第一种实现方式可以预先存储在终端设备中；或者，对应关系的第一种实现方式也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置，并发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以发送第三消息，第三消息可以指示对应关系的第一种实现方式，第三消息例如为广播消息。总之，终端设备能够获得对应关系的第一种实现方式，从而终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期来确定N的取值。
2、对应关系的第二种实现方式。
对应关系的第二种实现方式为：终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，N为第一值；或，终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，N为第二值。其中，第一值和第二值都是预先配置的取值。例如，第一值为1，或者也可以是其他取值，只要第一值为正整数即可；第二值可以为2，或者也可以是其他取值，只要第二值为正整数即可。例如，第二值大于第一值，或者，对于第一值和第二值的大小关系不做限制。
例如，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，系统默认寻呼周期(即，接入网设备通过广播指示的默认寻呼周期)为2.56s，则N为第一值，例如N为1，表明一个指示信息关联一个PO。又例如，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，系统默认寻呼周期(即，接入网设备通过广播指示的默认寻呼周期)为0.64s，则N为第二值。例如第二值为2，即，一个指示信息关联两个PO。
如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期是较为符合终端设备的业务需求的。此时N可以为1，表明网络对终端设备的寻呼粒度细化到了每个PO，可以减小终端设备错过寻呼的概率。而如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期就是系统默认寻呼周期，因此终端设备实际使用的寻呼周期比终端设备的业务所需求的周期要小。此时N可以为第二值，例如第二值大于第一值，则通过应用第二值，可以尽量减小终端设备的功耗。
需要注意的是，如果专用寻呼周期较小，而第二值较大，则终端设备可能会有错过寻呼的风险。例如，专用寻呼周期为1.28s，系统默认寻呼周期为0.64s，则较为合适的第二值为2，那么，如果将第二值设置的大于2，例如为3，则一个指示信息关联3个PO，如果指示信息指示不唤醒终端设备，则终端设备在这3个PO内都不监听，然而终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，有可能在这3个PO中的第一个PO或第三个PO会有终端设备的寻呼，则终端设备可能会错过寻呼。因此，如果采用对应关系的第二种实现方式，则较为合理的是，将第二值设置为2，这样，如果专用周期较大，那么终端设备可能会多耗费一些电量来监听，但是能够减小终端设备错过寻呼的概率。以及，即使终端设备多耗费了一些电量来监听，相对于现有的寻呼机制，还是能减小终端设备的功耗。
例如，对应关系的第二种实现方式可以通过协议规定，那么终端设备可以根据预定义的信息来确定N的取值与终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或者，对应关系的第二种实现方式可以预先存储在终端设备中；或者，对应关系的第二种实现方式也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置，并发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以发送第三消 息，第三消息可以指示对应关系的第二种实现方式，第三消息例如为广播消息。总之，终端设备能够获得对应关系的第二种实现方式，从而终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期来确定N的取值。
3、对应关系的第三种实现方式。
划分寻呼周期的多个取值范围，对应关系的第三种实现方式为：所划分的多个取值范围中的每个取值范围对应N的一种取值，不同的取值范围可以对应N的不同取值。例如，所划分的取值范围的个数可以大于或等于3。例如，可以划分3个取值范围，这3个取值范围可参考表1。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021105007-appb-000001
第一范围就是指专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，或者理解为，第一范围是指小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期的范围，如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，则该专用寻呼周期就属于第一范围。
第二范围可以包括一个或多个取值，如果第二范围包括一个取值，那么如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期的取值等于该取值，就表明该专用寻呼周期的取值属于第二范围；如果第二范围包括多个取值，那么如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期的取值等于这多个取值中的任一个，就表明该专用寻呼周期的取值属于第二范围。例如，第二范围为{1.28s}，则，如果专用寻呼周期为1.28s，就表明专用寻呼周期的取值属于第二范围，否则专用寻呼周期不属于第二范围。又例如，第二范围为{1.28s，2.56s}，则，如果专用寻呼周期为1.28s或2.56s，就表明专用寻呼周期的取值属于第二范围，否则，如果专用寻呼周期既不是1.28s也不是2.56s，就表明专用寻呼周期不属于第二范围。
同理，第三范围也可以包括一个或多个取值，如果第三范围包括一个取值，那么如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期的取值等于该取值，就表明该专用寻呼周期的取值属于第三范围；如果第三范围包括多个取值，那么如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期的取值等于这多个取值中的任一个，就表明该专用寻呼周期的取值属于第三范围。例如第二范围和第三范围可以没有交集。
例如，第二范围为{1.28s}，第三范围为{2.56s}。那么，如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期为1.28s，且该专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则该专用寻呼周期就属于第二范围，N的取值为2；或者，如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期为2.56s，且该专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，则该专用寻呼周期就属于第二范围，N的取值为4；或者，如果终端设备的专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期(例如，专用寻呼周期为0.64s，系统默认寻呼周期为0.64s)，则该专用寻呼周期就属于第一范围，N的取值为1。
例如，对应关系的第三种实现方式可以通过协议规定，那么终端设备可以根据预定义 的信息来确定N的取值与终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或者，对应关系的第三种实现方式可以预先存储在终端设备中；或者，对应关系的第三种实现方式也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置，并发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以发送第三消息，第三消息可以指示对应关系的第三种实现方式，第三消息例如为广播消息。总之，终端设备能够获得对应关系的第三种实现方式，从而终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期来确定N的取值。
需要注意的是，表1中N的取值只是示例，另外，取值范围的划分也只是示例，在实际中可以划分更多或更少的取值范围。
如上只是对专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系的几种示例，本申请实施例不限制专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间还可以有其他对应关系。对于如上的三种对应关系，可以选择其中一种使用，究竟选择哪一种，可以通过协议规定，或者也可以由网络选择，例如由接入网设备选择，并告知终端设备。
S25、当有终端设备的下行数据到达时，核心网设备向接入网设备发送寻呼消息，例如称为第一寻呼消息，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一寻呼消息。
第一寻呼消息可以包括寻呼信息，以及可以包括该终端设备的专用寻呼周期。该终端设备的专用寻呼周期可以是终端设备发送给核心网设备的，例如终端设备可以通过注册请求消息将专用寻呼周期发送给核心网设备。而接入网设备并不知道该终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此核心网设备可以将该终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备。对于接入网设备来说，也要根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期确定N的取值，接入网设备确定N的取值的方式与终端设备确定N的取值的方式类似，不多赘述。
可选的，如果执行了S21但未执行S22，那么，核心网设备还可以将终端设备的第一信息发送给接入网设备，例如核心网设备可以将该第一信息包括在第一寻呼消息中发送给接入网设备。指示信息是接入网设备发的，与核心网设备无关，因此核心网设备按照正常的机制寻呼终端设备即可。
S26、接入网设备发送第一指示信息，相应的，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息。
如果接入网设备通过第一消息指示使能第二功能，以及接入网设备根据终端设备的第一信息确定终端设备支持第二功能，则接入网设备所发送的第一指示信息可以关联N个PO，其中，接入网设备也可以采用与终端设备相同的方式确定N的取值。或者，如果接入网设备第一消息指示使能第二功能，但接入网设备根据终端设备的第一信息确定终端设备不支持第二功能，则接入网设备所发送的第一指示信息可以关联一个PO。或者，如果接入网设备不支持使能第二功能，那么，无论接入网设备根据终端设备的第一信息确定终端设备是支持第二功能还是不支持第二功能，接入网设备所发送的第一指示信息可以关联一个PO，即，不启用第二功能。
在5G技术中，为进一步节省终端设备的功耗，提出引入唤醒信号(wake-up signal，WUS)。WUS用于指示在与该WUS对应的PO内，终端设备是否需要醒来监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。WUS的时域位置可以为：一个寻呼周期内的第一个PO之前的一个偏移(offset)的位置。WUS与PO可以是一一对应，或者，一个WUS也可以对应多个PO。例如可参考图3，一个WUS可对应两个PO，其中，图3的横轴表示时间。如果WUS指示终端设备需要监听，则终端设备在这两个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信 息和寻呼消息；或者，如果WUS指示终端设备无需监听，则终端设备在这两个PO内无需监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
那么，作为第一指示信息的一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息可以包括在一个寻呼周期的第一个PO之前的下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)中，该DCI例如为WUS。使用该方式，终端设备接收WUS的位置可以被配置成较窄的时频位置，因此接收WUS比接收其他DCI会消耗更少的功率，更有利于终端设备的节能。第一指示信息可以指示监听寻呼，或者指示不监听寻呼。在本申请实施例中，监听寻呼是指监听寻呼控制信息，或者监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；不监听寻呼是指既不监听寻呼控制信息也不监听寻呼消息。此时，第一指示信息关联的N个PO，可以包括从该WUS之后的第一个PO开始的连续的N个PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以是该寻呼周期内包括的任意的N个PO，这N个PO在时域上可以连续也可以不连续；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括多个寻呼周期内的N个PO。另外，WUS在不包括第一指示信息时可能本就与一个或多个PO关联，那么在本申请实施例中，使得WUS本身所关联的PO与第一指示信息所关联的PO一致，即，WUS和第一指示信息都关联所述N个PO，以避免因关联不一致而导致终端设备的理解出现失误。
作为第一指示信息的另一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息也可以不包括在WUS中，而是包括在寻呼控制信息中。使用该方式，不需要引入其他的信号(如WUS)，而直接复用寻呼机制中寻呼控制信息，使得终端设备和网络设备侧的改动较小，实现更加容易。那么，第一指示信息可以指示监听寻呼，或者指示不监听寻呼。在本申请实施例中，监听寻呼是指监听寻呼控制信息，或者监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；不监听寻呼是指既不监听寻呼控制信息也不监听寻呼消息。需要说明的是，在该情况下，由于第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，对于当前PO(即，包括第一指示信息的寻呼控制信息所在的PO)，第一指示信息指示的是是否监听寻呼消息，对于N个PO中除当前PO之外的其他PO，第一指示信息指示的是是否监听寻呼控制信息，或者指示是否监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。此时，第一指示信息关联的N个PO，可以包括该DCI所在的PO，以及包括位于该PO之后的连续的N-1个PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括该寻呼周期内的任意的N个PO，这N个PO在时域上可以连续也可以不连续，这N个PO中可以包括该DCI所在的PO，或者也可以不包括该DCI所在的PO；或者，第一指示信息关联的N个PO也可以包括多个寻呼周期内的N个PO，这N个PO中可以包括该DCI所在的PO，或者也可以不包括该DCI所在的PO。
另外，可选的，在本申请实施例中，可以将终端设备划分为不同的分组，划分因素可以包括一种或多种。例如一种划分因素为终端设备的寻呼周期，终端设备的寻呼周期例如为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者也可以是终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期是终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。那么，可以将寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的每个范围就对应一个分组，如果一个终端设备的寻呼周期位于其中一个范围内，则该终端设备就属于该范围对应的分组。或者，另一种划分因素为终端设备的ID，可以将终端设备的ID划分为一个或多个范围，其中的每个范围就对应一个分组，如果一个终端设备的寻呼周期位于其中一个范围内，则该终端设备就属于该范围对应的分组。或者，再一种划分因素为终端设备对应的N的取值，例如将N的取值相同的终端设备划分为一个分组。或者，划分因素也可以包括多种，例如划分因素可 包括终端设备的寻呼周期和终端设备的ID，例如先将终端设备的寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的部分范围或全部范围中的每个范围中，又可以按照终端设备的ID进一步划分出一个或多个子范围，那么每个子范围可以对应一个分组。又例如，划分因素包括终端设备的寻呼周期和终端设备对应的N的取值，例如先将终端设备的寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的部分范围或全部范围中的每个范围中，又可以按照终端设备对应的N的取值进一步划分出一个或多个子范围，那么每个子范围可以对应一个分组。本申请实施例并不限制还有其他的划分因素以及划分方式。
其中，划分规则信息(或者称为分组规则信息)可以通过协议规定，则终端设备根据协议可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置。如果由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备可以告知终端设备，例如接入网设备可以通过广播消息发送分组规则信息。分组规则信息可以包括一个或多个分组的信息，以及这一个或多个分组中的每个分组所对应的范围(例如寻呼周期的取值范围，或者是其他相应的划分因素的范围)。
在将终端设备划分为一个或多个分组后，可以令这一个或多个分组中的每个分组对应一种指示信息。例如，指示信息可以占用一个或多个比特，这一个或多个比特的不同的取值(或者说，不同的状态)就对应不同的分组；又例如，指示信息可以为比特地图(bitmap)，bitmap包括一个或多个比特，这一个或多个比特中的每个比特代表一个分组，如果接入网设备发送的bitmap中的某个比特的取值为“1”，表明该指示信息对应该比特所对应的分组，而如果接入网设备发送的bitmap中的某个比特的取值为“0”，表明该指示信息不对应该比特所对应的分组。如果分组规则信息通过协议规定，那么分组与指示信息之间的对应关系也可以通过协议规定，或者分组与指示信息之间的对应关系可以由接入网设备配置，接入网设备可以告知终端设备，例如接入网设备可以通过广播消息发送分组与指示信息之间的对应关系。或者，如果分组规则信息通过协议规定，那么分组与指示信息之间的对应关系也可以通过协议规定，或者分组与指示信息之间的对应关系可以由接入网设备配置，接入网设备可以告知终端设备，例如接入网设备可以通过广播消息发送分组与指示信息之间的对应关系，在这种情况下，分组与指示信息之间的对应关系可以包括在分组规则信息中。
通过将终端设备进行分组，从而在通过指示信息进行指示时可以通过分组的方式指示，对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定指示信息不对应于该终端设备所属的分组，则该终端设备可以不对该指示信息进行响应，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。
例如，第一指示信息对应第一分组，第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
S27、终端设备根据第一指示信息确定对该终端设备的N个PO的监听情况。
如果终端设备未被划分分组，则终端设备接收第一指示信息后，可以根据第一指示信息确定对N个PO的监听情况。或者，如果终端设备被划分了分组，那么终端设备接收第一指示信息后，可以确定第一指示信息是否是该终端设备所属的分组所对应的指示信息。如果第一指示信息是该终端设备所属的分组对应的指示信息，则终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定对终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，否则，终端设备可以不对第一指示信息进行响应。例如该终端设备属于第一分组，而第一指示信息也对应于第一分组，因此终端设备确定第一指示信息是该终端设备所属的分组所对应的指示信息。则终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定对终端设备的N个PO的监听情况。
如果第一指示信息包括在位于PO前的DCI(例如WUS)中，终端设备可以根据WUS 包括的第一指示信息确定对N个PO的监听情况。
作为一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”和“唤醒”。那么，例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，则终端设备可以在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或者监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息(例如，终端设备在N个PO中的每个PO都会监听寻呼控制信息，如果在有些PO中监听的寻呼控制信息包括了寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO继续监听寻呼消息，那么终端设备在该PO就是监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；而如果在有些PO中监听的寻呼控制信息不包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO不必再监听寻呼消息，那么终端设备在该PO就是监听寻呼控制信息，而不监听寻呼消息)；或者，第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都既不用监听寻呼控制信息也不用监听寻呼消息。对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼终端设备，则可以先通过第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，再在N个PO中的一个或多个PO内发送包括该终端设备的标识的寻呼消息；而如果不需要寻呼终端设备，则可以通过第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息既可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，也可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的唤醒，指示更为全面。
例如可参考图4，为终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的一种示意图，图4以N＝2、且这两个PO包括WUS之后的第一个PO和第二个PO为例，其中，图4的横轴表示时间。图4中，位于PO之前的画斜线的矩形框表示WUS。例如对于图4中从左至右的第一个PO，终端设备在第一个PO之前接收了WUS，WUS包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该WUS之后的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第一个PO)和第二个PO(即，从左至右的第二个PO)均监听寻呼控制信息，如果在一个PO内监听的寻呼控制信息包括了寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内继续监听寻呼消息，在接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的ID)，则该终端设备被寻呼，终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者，如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果终端设备在一个PO内监听的寻呼控制信息不包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内无需监听寻呼消息。又例如，对于图4中从左至右的第三个PO，终端设备在第三个PO之前接收了WUS，WUS包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该WUS之后的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第三个PO)和第二个PO(即，从左至右的第四个PO)均不监听寻呼控制信息，也不监听寻呼消息。
作为另一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”，但不影响终端设备在N个PO内的“唤醒”。那么，例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，则终端设备可以在该WUS之后的第一个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或者监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或者，第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都既不用监听寻呼控制信息也不用监听寻呼消息。相当于，如果第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，那么视为第一指示信息与N个PO没有关联关系，终端设备只需正常在位于第一指示信息之后的PO内监听即可；而如果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则视为第一指示信息与N个PO有关联关系，终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都既不用监听寻呼控制信息也不用监听寻呼消息。对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼终端设备，则可以先通过第一指示信息指示监听寻呼消息，再在位于第一指示信息之后的第一个PO 内发送包括该终端设备的标识的寻呼消息；而如果不需要寻呼终端设备，则可以通过第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息仅指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，达到节省终端设备的功耗的目的。
例如可参考图5，为终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的一种示意图，图5以N＝2、且这两个PO包括WUS之后的第一个PO和第二个PO为例，其中，图5的横轴表示时间。图5中，位于PO之前的画斜线的矩形框表示WUS。例如对于图5中从左至右的第一个PO，终端设备在第一个PO之前接收了WUS，WUS包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该WUS之后的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第一个PO)监听寻呼控制信息，如果在该PO内监听的寻呼控制信息包括了寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内继续监听寻呼消息，在接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的ID)，则该终端设备被寻呼，终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者，如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果终端设备在该PO内监听的寻呼控制信息不包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内无需监听寻呼消息。又例如，对于图5中从左至右的第二个PO，终端设备在第二个PO之前接收了WUS，WUS包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该WUS之后的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第二个PO)和第二个PO(即，从左至右的第三个PO)均不监听寻呼控制信息，也不监听寻呼消息。
如果第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，终端设备可以根据寻呼控制信息包括的第一指示信息确定对N个PO的监听情况。需要说明的是，在该情况下，由于第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，对于当前PO(即，包括第一指示信息的寻呼控制信息所在的PO)，第一指示信息指示的是是否监听寻呼消息，而对于N个PO中除当前PO之外的其他PO，第一指示信息指示的是是否监听寻呼控制信息，或者指示是否监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”和“唤醒”。那么，例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，则终端设备可以在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内监听寻呼。其中，终端设备在这N个PO内，可以监听寻呼控制信息，也可以不监听寻呼控制信息，但对于接入网设备来说，在这N个PO内还是可以发送寻呼控制信息，因为除了寻呼该终端设备之外，接入网设备还可能寻呼其他的终端设备，其他的终端设备对应的N的取值与该终端设备对应的N的取值可能不同，因此较为优选的方式是，接入网设备在每个PO都会发送寻呼控制信息，以避免有些终端设备无法接收寻呼控制信息。或者，如果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼消息，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都不用监听寻呼消息。其中，终端设备在这N个PO内既然已无需监听寻呼消息，因此也无需监听寻呼控制信息，但同理，对于接入网设备来说，在这N个PO内还是可以发送寻呼控制信息。对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼终端设备，则可以先通过第一指示信息指示监听寻呼消息，再在N个PO中的一个或多个PO内发送包括该终端设备的标识的寻呼消息；而如果不需要寻呼终端设备，则可以通过第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息既可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，也可以指示终端设备在N个PO内的唤醒，指示更为全面。
例如可参考图6，为终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的一种示意图，图6以N＝2、且这两个PO包括寻呼控制信息所在的PO以及该PO之后且与该PO相邻的第一个PO为例， 其中，图6的横轴表示时间。图6中，位于PO内的画斜线的矩形框表示寻呼控制信息。例如对于图6中从左至右的第一个PO，终端设备在第一个PO内接收了寻呼控制信息，寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示监听寻呼。那么，如果该寻呼控制信息除了包括第一指示信息外还包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO(即，从左至右的第一个PO)监听寻呼消息，接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的ID)，则该终端设备被寻呼，终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者，如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果该寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息但不包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO不监听寻呼消息。接着，如果终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO内确定被调度(例如寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识)，则终端设备可以无需再监听后续的PO，而是可以与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，而如果终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO内未被调度(例如寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，或寻呼控制信息不包括调度信息)，则终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO之后且与该PO相邻的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第二个PO)监听寻呼控制信息，如果在该PO内监听的寻呼控制信息包括了寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内继续监听寻呼消息，接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的ID)，则该终端设备被寻呼，终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者，如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果终端设备在一个PO内监听的寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果终端设备在一个PO内监听的寻呼控制信息不包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内无需监听寻呼消息。又例如，对于图4中从左至右的第三个PO，终端设备在第三个PO内接收了寻呼控制信息，寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO(即，从左至右的第三个PO)不监听寻呼消息以及该PO之后且与该PO相邻的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第四个PO)不监听寻呼控制信息。在前文介绍了，虽然终端设备在有些PO可能无需监听寻呼控制信息，但是对于接入网设备来说，在这N个PO中的每个PO内还是可以都发送寻呼控制信息，而图6没有在每个PO内画出寻呼控制信息，是为了表示终端设备的行为，但这并不表示接入网设备的行为。
作为另一种可选的实施方式，第一指示信息可以影响终端设备在N个PO内的“休眠”，但不影响终端设备在N个PO内的“唤醒”。那么，例如第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，则终端设备可以在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO内监听寻呼控制信息，如果接收的寻呼控制信息包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内监听寻呼消息，在接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备被寻呼，该终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼，或者如果寻呼控制信息不包括寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该PO内不监听寻呼消息。或者，第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都不用监听寻呼消息。其中，终端设备在这N个PO内既然已无需监听寻呼消息，因此也无需监听寻呼控制信息，但对于接入网设备来说，在这N个PO内还是可以发送寻呼控制信息。相当于，如果第一指示信息指示监听寻呼，那么视为第一指示信息与N个PO没有关联关系，终端设备只需正常在第一指示信息所在的PO内监听即可；而如 果第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼，则视为第一指示信息与N个PO有关联关系，终端设备在与第一指示信息关联的N个PO内都不用监听寻呼消息。对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼终端设备，则可以先通过第一指示信息指示监听寻呼消息，再在寻呼控制信息所在的PO内发送包括该终端设备的标识的寻呼消息；而如果不需要寻呼终端设备，则可以通过第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第一指示信息仅指示终端设备在N个PO内的休眠，达到节省终端设备的功耗的目的。
例如可参考图7，为终端设备在N个PO的监听情况的一种示意图，图7以N＝2、且这两个PO包括寻呼控制信息所在的PO和在时域上位于该PO之后且与该PO相邻的第一个PO为例。图7中，位于PO内的画斜线的矩形框表示寻呼控制信息。例如对于图7中从左至右的第一个PO，终端设备在第一个PO内接收了寻呼控制信息，寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示监听寻呼。那么，如果该寻呼控制信息除了包括第一指示信息外还包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO(即，从左至右的第一个PO)监听寻呼消息，接收寻呼消息后，如果寻呼消息包括该终端设备的标识(例如该终端设备的ID)，则该终端设备被寻呼，终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，或者，如果寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的标识，则该终端设备未被寻呼；或者，如果该寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息但不包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，则终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO不监听寻呼消息。又例如，对于图7中从左至右的第二个PO，终端设备在第二个PO内接收了寻呼控制信息，寻呼控制信息包括第一指示信息，且第一指示信息指示不监听寻呼。那么终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO(即，从左至右的第二个PO)和在时域上与该PO相邻且位于该PO之后的第一个PO(即，从左至右的第三个PO)均不监听寻呼消息。虽然终端设备在有些PO可能无需监听寻呼控制信息，但是对于接入网设备来说，在这N个PO中的每个PO内还是可以都发送寻呼控制信息，而图7没有在每个PO内画出寻呼控制信息，是为了表示终端设备的行为，但这并不表示接入网设备的行为。
下面可参考图8，为采用本申请实施例所述的方法后终端设备监听的PO的一种示意图，图8中画斜线的部分表示寻呼控制信息。例如，系统默认周期为1.28秒，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为0.64秒，那么终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为0.64秒。如果终端设备按照目前的技术，以0.64秒为寻呼周期来监听PO，则对于一个寻呼周期内的每个PO，终端设备都需要监听，如图8中的第一行所示。又例如，系统默认周期为1.28秒，终端设备的专用寻呼周期也为1.28秒，那么终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为1.28秒。如果终端设备按照目前的技术，以1.28秒为寻呼周期来监听PO，同理对于一个寻呼周期内的每个PO，终端设备都需要监听，但因为1.28秒的寻呼周期间隔较长，相对于0.64秒的寻呼周期来说，终端设备需要监听的PO个数减少了一半，如图8中的第二行所示。再例如，系统默认周期为1.28秒，终端设备的专用寻呼周期为2.56秒，那么终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为1.28秒，此时，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期是小于终端设备的业务所需要的寻呼周期(即，专用寻呼周期)的，如果按照1.28秒进行监听，则对于终端设备来说需要耗费更多的功率。因此，可以采用本申请实施例提供的方案，使得指示信息关联一个或多个PO，如果接入网设备不会寻呼终端设备，则接入网设备发送的指示信息可以指示不监听寻呼消息，例如图8中的第三行，画虚线的矩形框表示的PO是指终端设备无需监听的PO。可见，通过本申请实施例提供的方法，减少了终端设备监听的PO的个数，在不改变终端设备的 寻呼周期的确定规则的基础上能够减小终端设备的功耗。
在本申请实施例中，指示信息可以关联多个寻呼时机，如果指示信息指示无需监听寻呼(或，无需监听寻呼消息)，则终端设备在该指示信息所关联的PO内不必监听寻呼，而是可以休眠。也就是说，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。
当终端设备(如智能手机、智能手表或智能手环等)在没有通信业务的情况下，例如待机情况下，终端设备仍在消耗电池电量，例如终端设备会继续执行RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态下的寻呼功能，因此终端设备仍存在功率消耗。采用本申请实施例提供的方法后，能够减少终端设备在RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态下使用寻呼功能所带来的功率消耗，从而减少消耗的电池电量，延长终端设备的待机时间。
为了解决相同的技术问题，本申请实施例提供第二种通信方法，通过该方法，可以减小终端设备的功耗。请参见图9，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图1所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC非活跃态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图1所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S91、终端设备向接入网设备发送第一信息，接入网设备接收来自终端设备的第一信息。
例如，终端设备可以在随机接入过程中向接入网设备发送第一信息，例如第一信息可以承载在随机接入过程的第三消息(Msg3)或消息B(MsgB)中。或者，终端设备也可以在随机接入完成后向接入网设备发送第一信息，例如第一信息可以承载在RRC消息(例如，UE能力信息消息)或其他类型的消息中。
关于S91的更多内容，可参考图2所示的实施例中的S21的介绍。
S92、接入网设备发送第一消息，相应的，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以指示使能第二功能，或者说，第一消息可以指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO。
例如，接入网设备可以通过广播方式发送第一消息，或者说，第一消息可以是广播消息。例如第一消息可以是系统消息，或者第一消息也可以是除系统消息外的其他的广播消息。或者，第一消息也可以是单播消息，例如第一消息可以是RRC消息(例如用于将终端设备释放到RRC非活跃态的RRC释放消息，或者其他RRC消息)或媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)控制元素(control element，CE)等。如果第一消息是单播消息，则第一消息还可以包括接入网设备实际应用的寻呼周期。
关于S92的更多内容，可参考图2所示的实施例中的S23的介绍。
S93、终端设备确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的终端设备的PO的个数。其中，如果终端设备接收了第一消息，且第一消息指示使能第二功能，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个PO，则终端设备可以执行S24；或者，如果终端 设备未接收第一消息，或者接收的第一消息指示不使能第二功能，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息不能关联终端设备的多个PO，或指示来自接入网设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的一个PO，那么终端设备可以不必执行S24。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以根据终端设备的专用寻呼周期确定N的取值，关于终端设备的专用寻呼周期与N的取值之间的对应关系，以及终端设备确定N的取值的方式等，可参考图2所示的实施例中的S24的相关介绍。如果终端设备采用这种方式来确定N的取值，则接入网设备也可以采用相同的方式确定N的取值，不多赘述。
或者，终端设备还可以通过另一种方式来确定N的取值。例如，网络设备(例如接入网设备)向终端设备发送第二消息，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第二消息，第二消息可以指示N的取值。相当于可以由接入网设备来确定N的取值，并将N的取值告知终端设备，则终端设备无需再自行确定N的取值。接入网设备确定N的取值的方式，与终端设备确定N的取值的方式类似，不多赘述。例如，第一消息和第二消息可以是同一条消息，或者也可以是不同的消息。
S94、当有终端设备的下行数据到达时，核心网设备向接入网设备发送通知消息，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的通知消息。该通知消息用于指示有终端设备的下行数据到达。
S95、接入网设备发送第一指示信息，相应的，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一指示信息。
关于S95的更多内容，可参考图2所示的实施例中的S26的介绍。
S96、终端设备根据第一指示信息确定对终端设备的N个PO的监听情况。
关于S96的更多内容，可参考图2所示的实施例中的S27的介绍。
在本申请实施例中，指示信息可以关联多个寻呼时机，如果指示信息指示无需监听寻呼(或，无需监听寻呼消息)，则终端设备在该指示信息所关联的PO内不必监听寻呼，而是可以休眠。也就是说，即使终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期较小，但终端设备也可以只在寻呼周期内的一部分PO进行监听，而在该寻呼周期内剩余的PO无需监听。由于需要监听的PO的数量有所减少，因此可以节省终端设备的功耗。
接下来，考虑另一个问题。按照目前的寻呼机制，即使没有被寻呼的终端设备，也需要在该终端设备的PO监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息，导致功率的浪费。为此，本申请实施例提出，可以采用分组寻呼的机制，将终端设备分为一个或多个分组，接入网设备可以在寻呼时可以按照分组进行寻呼，则未被寻呼的分组内的终端设备就无需接收寻呼消息，以减小这些终端设备的功耗。
本申请实施例提供第三种通信方法，通过该方法可以实现分组寻呼，减小终端设备的功耗。请参见图10，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图1所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC空闲态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图1所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的第一终端设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S101、第一终端设备向核心网设备发送第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，核心网设备接收来自第一终端设备的该专用寻呼周期。这样核心网设备就获得了第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期。
例如第一终端设备可以通过NAS消息向核心网设备发送该专用寻呼周期，该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是注册过程中的其他NAS消息，或者也可以是注册完成之后的相应的NAS消息。
S102、当有第一终端设备的下行数据到达时，核心网设备向接入网设备发送寻呼消息，例如称为第一寻呼消息，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一寻呼消息。
第一寻呼消息可以包括寻呼信息，以及可以包括第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期。接入网设备并不知道第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，因此核心网设备可以将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备。
S103、接入网设备发送第二消息，相应的，第一终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第二消息。
在本申请实施例中，可以将终端设备划分为不同的分组，划分因素可以包括一种或多种。例如一种划分因素为终端设备的寻呼周期，终端设备的寻呼周期例如为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者也可以是终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期是终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。那么，可以将寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的每个范围就对应一个分组，如果一个终端设备的寻呼周期位于其中一个范围内，则该终端设备就属于该范围对应的分组。或者，另一种划分因素为终端设备的ID，可以将终端设备的ID划分为一个或多个范围，其中的每个范围就对应一个分组，如果一个终端设备的寻呼周期位于其中一个范围内，则该终端设备就属于该范围对应的分组。或者，再一种划分因素为终端设备对应的N的取值，例如将N的取值相同的终端设备划分为一个分组。或者，划分因素也可以包括多种，例如划分因素可包括终端设备的寻呼周期和终端设备的ID，例如先将终端设备的寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的部分范围或全部范围中的每个范围中，又可以按照终端设备的ID进一步划分出一个或多个子范围，那么每个子范围可以对应一个分组。又例如，划分因素包括终端设备的寻呼周期和终端设备对应的N的取值，例如先将终端设备的寻呼周期划分为一个或多个范围，其中的部分范围或全部范围中的每个范围中，又可以按照终端设备对应的N的取值进一步划分出一个或多个子范围，那么每个子范围可以对应一个分组。本申请实施例并不限制还有其他的划分因素以及划分方式。
其中，划分规则信息(或者称为分组规则信息)可以通过协议规定，则终端设备根据协议可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息可以预先存储在终端设备中，则终端设备根据预先存储的信息就可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息也可以由网络设备(例如接入网设备)配置。分组规则信息可以包括一个或多个分组的信息，以及这一个或多个分组中的每个分组所对应的取值范围(例如寻呼周期的取值范围，或者是其他相应的划分因素的取值范围)。
按照前文所述的，在对终端设备进行分组时，可以采用不同的划分因素，那么在不同的划分因素下，终端设备可以分别有相应的分组方式，例如对于第一终端设备来说，按照寻呼周期分组，和按照寻呼概率分组，显然分组方式是不同的，第一终端设备所属的分组也是不同的。为此，第二消息可以使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组，即，接入网设 备可以通过第二消息来指示使能通过寻呼周期进行分组的方式，则第一终端设备就可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组是按照寻呼周期进行分组的情况下所对应的分组。如果分组规则信息通过协议规定，或者分组规则信息预先存储在终端设备中，或者分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，则接入网设备都可以发送第二消息，来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组。第二消息例如为广播消息。第一终端设备接收第二消息后，就可以确定终端设备能够应用通过寻呼周期进行分组的方式。
如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备除了可以发送第二消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式外，还可以发送第三消息，第三消息可以包括分组规则信息。第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后，根据分组规则信息和相应的划分因素(例如第一终端设备的寻呼周期)，就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。第二消息和第三消息例如都为广播消息，可能有多个终端设备都能接收第二消息和/或第三消息，例如第一终端设备是接收了第二消息和第三消息的其中一个终端设备。
或者，如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备也可以不必通过专门的消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。例如接入网设备还是可以发送第二消息，但第二消息包括分组规则信息，相当于，接入网设备通过发送分组规则信息，也就隐含指示了使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后，根据分组规则信息和相应的划分因素(例如第一终端设备的寻呼周期)，就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。第二消息例如为广播消息，可能有多个终端设备都能接收第二消息，例如第一终端设备是接收了第二消息的其中一个终端设备。
可选的，不同的分组还可以对应不同的N的取值，关于N的取值的含义，可参考图2所示的实施例的介绍。例如，在按照寻呼周期划分时，第一分组对应的N的取值为1，表明对于第一分组的终端设备来说，指示信息可以与1个PO关联；又例如，第二分组对应的N的取值为2，表明对于第二分组的终端设备来说，指示信息可以与2个PO关联，等等。关于这部分内容，可参考图2所示的实施例的介绍。那么，分组与N的取值具有对应关系，该对应关系可以通过协议规定，或者终端设备可以预先存储，或者也可以由接入网设备配置。如果由接入网设备配置，则该对应关系可以包括在分组规则信息中。如果接入网设备会发送分组规则信息，则会一并发送该对应关系。
S104、接入网设备发送第一消息，相应的，第一终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以包括第一分组信息，第一分组信息可指示第一分组，第一分组可包括一个或多个终端设备。
作为第一消息的一种可选的实施方式，第一消息可以是位于一个寻呼周期的第一个PO之前的DCI，例如为WUS。第一消息包括第一分组信息，第一分组信息指示的第一分组就是被寻呼的分组，则第一终端设备根据WUS就能确定第一终端设备是否被寻呼。由于WUS是在PO之前发送，那么如果终端设备确定未被寻呼，则第一终端设备在该WUS所关联的PO内无需监听，从而能够在更大程度上节省终端设备的功耗。
或者，作为第一消息的另一种可选的实施方式，第一消息也可以是寻呼控制信息。第一消息包括第一分组信息，第一分组信息指示的第一分组就是被寻呼的分组，则第一终端设备根据寻呼控制信息就能确定第一终端设备是否被寻呼。如果第一终端设备确定未被寻呼，则第一终端设备在该寻呼控制信息所在的PO内就可以无需继续监听寻呼消息，从而节省终端设备的功耗。
本申请实施例将终端设备进行分组，从而可以采用分组方式寻呼终端设备。第一分组信息所指示的第一分组，就表示被寻呼的分组。对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定来自接入网设备的分组信息(例如第一分组信息)不是该终端设备所属的分组的信息，则该终端设备可以不在相应的PO监听，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。而且本申请实施例可以采用寻呼周期来划分终端设备的分组，例如可以将寻呼周期较大的终端设备划分为一组，例如称为组1，以及将寻呼周期较小的终端设备划分为一组，例如称为组2，那么如果网络需要寻呼组2，组1内的终端设备根据来自网络的分组信息可知网络并未寻呼组1，则组1内的终端设备不必进行响应，而是可以继续休眠，从而减小了组1内的终端设备的功耗。可见，本申请实施例按照寻呼周期来分组，可以更好地减小终端设备的功耗。
S105、第一终端设备确定第一终端设备是否属于第一分组。
分组规则信息如果通过协议规定，则终端设备根据协议可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息可以预先存储在终端设备中，则终端设备根据预先存储的信息就可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息也可以由接入网设备配置，则接入网设备可以发送分组规则信息，那么第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。
第一终端设备确定了第一终端设备所属的分组，且第一终端设备也接收了第一分组信息，那么第一终端设备就可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组是否是第一分组。
如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，则继续执行S106，而如果第一终端设备不属于第一分组，则不必执行S106，流程结束。
S106、第一终端设备在第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼。
第一消息可以是位于一个寻呼周期的第一个PO之前的DCI，例如为WUS。那么，第一消息关联的PO，可以是指位于该WUS之后的一个或多个PO，这一个或多个PO在时域上可以是连续的PO，也可以是不连续的PO，且这一个或多个PO可以位于一个寻呼周期内，或者也可以位于多个寻呼周期内。那么，如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，表明第一终端设备所在的分组被寻呼，则第一终端设备就可以在位于该WUS之后的一个或多个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼第一分组内的终端设备，则接入网设备可以在第一消息所关联的一个或多个PO内进行寻呼。例如第一终端设备在其中一个PO内监听到了寻呼控制信息，且该寻呼控制信息包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，则第一终端设备可以继续在该PO内监听寻呼消息，在接收寻呼消息后，如果该寻呼消息包括第一终端设备的ID，表明第一终端设备被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，而如果该寻呼消息不包括第一终端设备的ID，表明第一终端设备未被寻呼，则第一终端设备在该PO内不再监听，等到下一个与该WUS关联的PO到来时再进行监听；或者，如果第一终端设备在其中一个PO内监听到了寻呼控制信息，但该寻呼控制信息不包括用于调度寻呼消息的调度信息，表明第一终端设备未被寻呼，则第一终端设备在该PO内不再监听，等到下一个与该WUS关联的PO到来时再进行监听。
或者，第一消息也可以是寻呼控制信息。那么，第一消息可以关联一个或多个PO，如果第一消息关联一个PO，则这一个例如为指该寻呼控制信息所在的PO；或者，如果第一消息关联多个PO，则这多个PO可以包括该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，以及包括位于该寻呼控制信息所在的PO之后的至少一个PO，或者，第一消息关联的多个PO中也可以不包括该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，而是只包括位于该寻呼控制信息所在的PO之后的至少一 个PO。其中，第一消息如果关联多个PO，则这多个PO在时域上可以是连续的PO，或者也可以是不连续的PO，且这一个或多个PO可以位于一个寻呼周期内，或者也可以位于多个寻呼周期内。例如第一消息关联的PO是指该寻呼控制信息所在的PO，那么，如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，表明第一终端设备所在的分组被寻呼，则第一终端设备就可以在该PO内监听寻呼消息，对于接入网设备来说，如果需要寻呼第一分组内的终端设备，则接入网设备可以在第一消息所关联的一个或多个PO内进行寻呼。第一终端设备在接收寻呼消息后，如果该寻呼消息包括第一终端设备的ID，表明第一终端设备被寻呼，则第一终端设备可以进一步与接入网设备建立RRC连接等，而如果该寻呼消息不包括第一终端设备的ID，表明第一终端设备未被寻呼，则第一终端设备在该PO内不再监听，等到下一个PO到来时再进行监听。
本申请实施例将终端设备进行分组，从而可以采用分组方式寻呼终端设备。对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定来自接入网设备的分组信息(例如第一分组信息)不是该终端设备所属的分组的信息，则该终端设备可以不在相应的PO监听，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。而且本申请实施例可以采用寻呼周期来划分终端设备的分组，分组方式更为合理，可以更好地减小终端设备的功耗。
为了解决与第三种通信方法所解决的技术问题相同的技术问题，本申请实施例提供第四种通信方法，通过该方法可以实现分组寻呼，减小终端设备的功耗。请参见图11，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图1所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC非活跃态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图1所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的第一终端设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S111、第一终端设备向核心网设备发送第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，核心网设备接收来自第一终端设备的该专用寻呼周期。
关于S111的更多内容，可参考图10所示的实施例中对于S101的介绍。
S112、核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的该专用寻呼周期。
对于处于RRC非活跃态的终端设备来说，是由接入网设备进行寻呼，因此接入网设备需要知道第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，那么核心网设备可以将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备。
S113、第一终端设备向接入网设备发送第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期，接入网设备接收来自第一终端设备的该专用寻呼周期。
其中，S111～S112与S113，这两者是并列的两种方案，只需执行其中一种即可。即，第一终端设备可以将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给核心网设备，由核心网设备发送给接入网设备，或者，第一终端设备也可以直接将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备，无需核心网设备转发。
例如，第一终端设备可以在随机接入过程中将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接 入网设备，例如第一终端设备可以通过随机接入过程中的Msg3或MsgB将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备；或者，第一终端设备也可以在随机接入成功后将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备，例如第一终端设备可以通过RRC消息或其他类型的消息将第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期发送给接入网设备。
S114、接入网设备发送第二消息，相应的，第一终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第二消息。
如果分组规则信息通过协议规定，或者分组规则信息预先存储在终端设备中，或者分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，则接入网设备都可以发送第二消息，来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组。第二消息例如为广播消息，或者也可以是单播消息(如RRC释放消息)。第一终端设备接收第二消息后，就可以确定终端设备能够应用通过寻呼周期进行分组的方式。
如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备除了可以发送第二消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式外，还可以发送第三消息，第三消息可以包括分组规则信息。第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后，根据分组规则信息和相应的划分因素(例如第一终端设备的寻呼周期)，就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。第二消息例如为广播消息，或者为单播消息。第三消息例如为广播消息，或者为单播消息。
或者，如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备也可以不必通过专门的消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。例如接入网设备还是可以发送第二消息，但第二消息包括分组规则信息，相当于，接入网设备通过发送分组规则信息，也就隐含指示了使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后，根据分组规则信息和相应的划分因素(例如第一终端设备的寻呼周期)，就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。第二消息例如为广播消息，或者为单播消息。
或者，如果分组规则信息由接入网设备配置，那么接入网设备可以不必通过专门的消息来使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式，也可以不必将分组规则信息发送给终端设备。例如，接入网设备可以向第一终端设备发送第二消息，此时的第二消息为单播消息，第二消息可以指示第一终端设备所属的分组。即，接入网设备可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组，并将第一终端设备所属的分组的信息告知第一终端设备，从而第一终端设备无需自行确定第一终端设备所属的分组。而且，接入网设备指示了第一终端设备所属的分组，也相当于隐含指示了使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组的方式。通过这种方式，能够节省信令开销，且减小了终端设备的工作量。
可选的，不同的分组可以对应不同的N的取值，关于N的取值的含义，可参考图2所示的实施例的介绍。例如，在按照寻呼周期划分时，第一分组对应的N的取值为1，表明对于第一分组的终端设备来说，指示信息可以与1个PO关联；又例如，第二分组对应的N的取值为2，表明对于第二分组的终端设备来说，指示信息可以与2个PO关联，等等。关于这部分内容，可参考图2所示的实施例的介绍。那么，分组与N的取值具有对应关系，该对应关系可以通过协议规定，或者终端设备可以预先存储，或者也可以由接入网设备配置。如果由接入网设备配置，则该对应关系可以包括在分组规则信息中。如果接入网设备会发送分组规则信息，则会一并发送该对应关系。或者，如果接入网设备未发送分组规则信息，例如接入网设备向第一终端设备发送了第二消息，第二消息指示第一终端设备所属的分组，那么可选的，第二消息还可以指示第一终端设备所属的分组对应的N的取 值。
关于S114的更多内容，可参考图10所示的实施例中对于S103的介绍。
S115、当有第一终端设备的下行数据到达时，核心网设备向接入网设备发送通知消息，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的通知消息。该通知消息可以指示有第一终端设备的下行数据到达。
S116、接入网设备发送第一消息，相应的，第一终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以包括第一分组信息，第一分组信息可指示第一分组，第一分组可包括一个或多个终端设备。
关于S116的更多内容，可参考图10所示的实施例中对于S104的介绍。
S117、第一终端设备确定第一终端设备是否属于第一分组。
分组规则信息如果通过协议规定，则终端设备根据协议可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息可以预先存储在终端设备中，则终端设备根据预先存储的信息就可以确定终端设备所属的分组。或者，分组规则信息也可以由接入网设备配置，则接入网设备可以发送分组规则信息，那么第一终端设备接收分组规则信息后就能确定第一终端设备所属的分组。或者，接入网设备通过第二消息指示了第一终端设备所属的分组，则第一终端设备根据第二消息就可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组。
第一终端设备确定了第一终端设备所属的分组，且第一终端设备也接收了第一分组信息，那么第一终端设备就可以确定第一终端设备所属的分组是否是第一分组。
如果第一终端设备属于第一分组，则继续执行S117，而如果第一终端设备不属于第一分组，则不必执行S117，流程结束。
S118、第一终端设备在第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼。
关于S118的更多内容，可参考图10所示的实施例中对于S106的介绍。
本申请实施例将终端设备进行分组，从而可以采用分组方式寻呼终端设备。对于一个终端设备来说，如果确定来自接入网设备的分组信息(例如第一分组信息)不是该终端设备所属的分组的信息，则该终端设备可以不在相应的PO监听，这样可以减小终端设备的虚警概率。而且本申请实施例可以采用寻呼周期来划分终端设备的分组，分组方式更为合理，可以更好地减小终端设备的功耗。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的装置。因此，上文中的内容均可以用于后续实施例中，重复的内容不再赘述。
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1200的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1200例如为终端设备1200。示例性地，终端设备1200能够实现图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例所述的终端设备的功能。
终端设备1200包括处理模块1210和收发模块1220。示例性地，终端设备1200可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备1200是终端设备时，收发模块1220可以包括发射器和/或接收器，发射器可以包括天线和射频电路等，接收器也可以包括天线和射频电路等。其中，发射器和接收器可以统一构成收发器，收发器可实现发射器和接收器的功能，或者，发射器和接收器也可以是单独部署的两个功能模块。处理模块1210可以包括处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)。当终端设备1200是具有上述终端设备功能的部件时，收发模块1220可以是射频单元，处理 模块1210可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备1200是芯片系统时，收发模块1220可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块1210可以是芯片系统的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1210可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1220可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块1210可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S24和S27，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S21、S23和S26，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块1210可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S93和S96，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S91、S92和S95，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块和接收模块可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块称为收发模块1220，收发模块1220既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块1220可以用于执行图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块1220是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块1220是接收模块；或者，发送模块和接收模块也可以是两个功能模块，收发模块1220可以视为这两个功能模块的统称，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
其中，收发模块1220，用于从网络设备接收第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；
处理模块1210，用于确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的终端设备1200的PO的个数，N的取值与终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；
收发模块1220，还用于从所述网络设备接收第一指示信息；
处理模块1210，还用于根据所述第一指示信息确定对终端设备1200的N个PO的监听情况。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式确定N的取值：
根据终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值；或，
从所述网络设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示N的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同N的取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块1220，还用于从所述网络设备接收第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
处理模块1210，还用于根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
处理模块1210，还用于预先存储N的取值与终端设备1200的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据所述第一指示信息确定对终端设备1200的N个PO的监听情况：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据所述第一指示信息确定对终端设备1200的N个PO的监听情况：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和/或寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据所述第一指示信息确定对终端设备1200的N个PO的监听情况：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设 备的寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式根据所述第一指示信息确定对终端设备1200的N个PO的监听情况：
所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述PO之前的下行控制信息之后的第一个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210，还用于确定所述第一指示信息对应于终端设备1200所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1220，还用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
终端设备1200是否支持所述指示信息；
终端设备1200是否支持所述指示信息关联终端设备1200的多个PO；
节能需求；或，
请求将所述指示信息关联终端设备1200的多个PO。
关于处理模块1210和收发模块1220所具体能够实现的功能，可参考图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例的介绍，不多赘述。
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1300的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1300例如为网络设备1300。示例性地，网络设备1300能够实现图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例所述的接入网设备的功能。
网络设备1300包括处理模块1310和收发模块1320。关于网络设备1300的实现方式，可参考对于终端设备1200的实现方式的介绍。
例如，处理模块1310可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如确定N的取值的操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1320可以用于执行图2所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S21～S23以及S25～S26，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块1310可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如确定N的取值的操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1320可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S91～S92以及S94～S95，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块1320的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块1220的实现方式的介绍。
其中，收发模块1320，用于发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；
处理模块1310，用于确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的所述终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；
收发模块1320，还用于发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息关联N个PO。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1310用于通过如下方式确定N的取值：
根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1310用于通过如下方式根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1310用于通过如下方式根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1310用于通过如下方式根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值：
根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块1320，还用于发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
处理模块1310，还用于根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
处理模块1310，还用于预先存储N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第一唤醒信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
所述第一唤醒信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1320，还用于从终端设备或核心网设备接收第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息；
所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO；
节能需求；或，
请求将所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一指示信息对应于所述终端设备所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
关于处理模块1310和收发模块1320所具体能够实现的功能，可参考图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例的介绍，不多赘述。
图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1400的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1400例如为终端设备1400。示例性地，终端设备1400能够实现图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例所述的第一终端设备的功能。
终端设备1400包括处理模块1410和收发模块1420。关于终端设备1400的实现方式，可参考对于终端设备1200的实现方式的介绍。
例如，处理模块1410可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由第一终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S105，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1420可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由第一终端设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S101、S103、S104和S106，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块1410可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由第一终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S117，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1420可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由第一终端设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S111、S113、S114、S116和S118，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块1420的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块1220的实现方式的介绍。
其中，收发模块1420，用于从接入网设备接收第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一分组信息，所述第一分组信息用于指示第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备；
处理模块1410，用于确定终端设备1400属于所述第一分组，其中，所述第一分组是按照终端设备的寻呼周期划分的；
收发模块1420，还用于在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼。
作为一种可选的实施方式，终端设备的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者为终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，其中，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一消息为位于PO之前的下行控制信息，收发模块1420用于通过如下方式在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼：
在所述下行控制信息所关联的PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一消息为寻呼控制信息，收发模块1420用于通过如下方式在所述第一消息关联的PO内监听寻呼：
在所述寻呼控制信息所在的PO内监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1420还用于：
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组；或，
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息包括分组规则信息，所述分组规则信息包括至少一个分组的信息，以及所述至少一个分组中的每个分组所对应的寻呼周期的取 值范围；或，
从所述接入网设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示终端设备1400所属的分组。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1420，还用于向所述接入网设备或核心网设备发送终端设备1400的专用寻呼周期。
关于处理模块1410和收发模块1420所具体能够实现的功能，可参考图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例的介绍，不多赘述。
图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1500的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1500例如为网络设备1500。示例性地，网络设备1500能够实现图10所示的实施例或图10所示的实施例所述的接入网设备的功能。
网络设备1500包括处理模块1510和收发模块1520。关于网络设备1500的实现方式，可参考对于终端设备1200的实现方式的介绍。
例如，处理模块1510可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1520可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S102、S103和S104，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块1510可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1520可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作和发送操作，例如S112、S113、S114和S116，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块1520的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块1220的实现方式的介绍。
其中，收发模块1520，用于发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一分组信息，所述第一分组信息用于指示第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备；
处理模块1510，用于确定第一终端设备属于所述第一分组，其中，所述第一分组是按照终端设备的寻呼周期划分的；
收发模块1520，还用于在所述第一消息关联的PO内寻呼所述第一终端设备。
作为一种可选的实施方式，终端设备的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期，或者为终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期，其中，终端设备实际应用的寻呼周期为终端设备的专用寻呼周期和系统默认寻呼周期中的较小值。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1520还用于：
发送第二消息，所述第二消息用于使能通过寻呼周期将终端设备进行分组；或，
发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括分组规则信息，所述分组规则信息包括至少一个分组的信息，以及所述至少一个分组中的每个分组所对应的寻呼周期的取值范围；或，
向所述第一终端设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示所述第一终端设备所属的分组。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1520，还用于从所述第一终端设备接收所述第一终端设备的专用寻呼周期。
关于处理模块1510和收发模块1520所具体能够实现的功能，可参考图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例的介绍，不多赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述各个方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置为终端设备时，图16示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图16中，终端设备以手机作为例子。如图16所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图16中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元(收发单元可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能；或者，收发单元也可以包括两个功能单元，分别为能够实现接收功能的接收单元和能够实现发送功能的发送单元)，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图15所示，终端设备包括收发单元1610和处理单元1620。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元1610中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元1610中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元1610包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元1610用于执行上述图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元1620用于执行上述图2所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中终端设备侧除了收发操作之外的其他全部操作或部分操作。或者，收发单元1610用于执行上述图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中第一终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元1620用于执行上述图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中第一终端设备侧除了收发操作之外的其他全部操作或部分操作。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口；处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时，可以参照图17所示的设备。作为一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图12中处理模块1210的功能。作为又一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图14中处理模块1410的功能。在图17中，该设备包括处理器1710，发送数据处理器1720，接收数据处理器1730。上述实施例中的处理模块1210可以是图16中的该处理器1710，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块1220可以是图16中的发送数据 处理器1720和/或接收数据处理器1730，并完成相应的功能。或者，上述实施例中的处理模块1410可以是图16中的该处理器1710，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块1420可以是图16中的发送数据处理器1720和/或接收数据处理器1730，并完成相应的功能。虽然图16中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器，但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明，仅是示意性的。
图18示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1800中包括调制子系统、中央处理子系统、周边子系统等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子系统。具体的，该调制子系统可以包括处理器1803，接口1804。其中，处理器1803完成上述处理模块1210的功能，接口1804完成上述收发模块1220的功能。或者，处理器1803完成上述处理模块1410的功能，接口1804完成上述收发模块1420的功能。作为另一种变形，该调制子系统包括存储器1806、处理器1803及存储在存储器1806上并可在处理器上运行的程序，该处理器1803执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是，所述存储器1806可以是非易失性的，也可以是易失性的，其位置可以位于调制子系统内部，也可以位于处理装置1800中，只要该存储器1806可以连接到所述处理器1803即可。
本申请实施例中的装置为网络设备时，该装置可以如图19所示。装置1900包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1910和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)(也可称为数字单元，digital unit，DU)1920。所述RRU 1910可以称为收发模块，该收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，或者，该收发模块可以是一个能够实现发送和接收功能的模块。该收发模块可以与图13中的收发模块1320对应。或者，该收发模块可以与图15中的收发模块1520对应。可选地，该收发模块还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线1911和射频单元1912。所述RRU 1910部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 1920部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 1910与BBU 1920可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU 1920为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理模块，可以与图13中的处理模块1310对应，或者可以与图15中的处理模块1510对应，BBU1920(处理模块)主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，生成上述指示信息等。
在一个示例中，所述BBU 1920可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络，5G网络或其他网络)。所述BBU 1920还包括存储器1921和处理器1922。所述存储器1921用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器1922用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1921和处理器1922可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated  circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。
应注意，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现 有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的计算机可读存储介质，可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于：计算机可读介质可以包括随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read only memory，EEPROM)、紧凑型光盘只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)、通用串行总线闪存盘(universal serial bus flash disk)、移动硬盘、或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此，本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (28)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    从网络设备接收第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；
    确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的所述终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；
    从所述网络设备接收第一指示信息；
    根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，确定N的取值，包括：
    根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值；或，
    从所述网络设备接收第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示N的取值。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
    所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
    所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
  5. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
    所述专用寻呼周期大于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
    其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
  6. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同N的取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
  7. 根据权利要求3～6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从所述网络设备接收第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
    根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
    预先存储N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
  8. 根据权利要求1～7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
    所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
    所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或所述N个PO内监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和/或寻呼消息。
  11. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
    所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼消息，则，在当前的PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，以及，在所述N个PO中除所述当前的PO外的剩余PO内不监听来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息。
  12. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，根据所述第一指示信息确定对所述终端设备的N个PO的监听情况，包括：
    所述第一指示信息用于指示监听寻呼，则，在所述PO之前的下行控制信息之后的第一个PO内监听寻呼控制信息，或监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一指示信息用于指示不监听寻呼，则，在所述N个PO内不监听寻呼控制信息和寻呼消息。
  13. 根据权利要求1～12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定所述第一指示信息对应于所述终端设备所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多个终端设备。
  14. 根据权利要求1～13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
    所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息；
    所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO；
    节能需求；或，
    请求将所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO。
  15. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示来自所述网络设备的一个指示信息关联终端设备的多个寻呼时机PO，所述指示信息用于唤醒终端设备或不唤醒终端设备；
    确定N的取值，N为一个指示信息所关联的所述终端设备的PO的个数，N的取值与 所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期相关，N为正整数；
    发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息关联N个PO。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，确定N的取值，包括：
    根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二值是根据所述专用寻呼周期和所述系统默认寻呼周期确定的取值，包括：
    所述第二值＝所述专用寻呼周期/所述系统默认寻呼周期。
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第一值；或，
    所述专用寻呼周期小于或等于系统默认寻呼周期，确定N为第二值；
    其中，所述第一值和所述第二值均为预先配置的取值。
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期，确定N的取值，包括：
    根据所述专用寻呼周期所属的取值范围，确定N的取值，其中，不同的取值范围对应不同取值，且取值范围的个数大于或等于3。
  21. 根据权利要求17～20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
    根据预定义的信息，确定N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系；或，
    预先存储N的取值与所述终端设备的专用寻呼周期之间的对应关系。
  22. 根据权利要求15～21任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一唤醒信息包括在寻呼控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼消息，或用于指示不监听寻呼消息，所述寻呼控制信息用于调度寻呼消息；或，
    所述第一唤醒信息包括在PO之前的下行控制信息中，所述第一唤醒信息用于指示监听寻呼，或用于指示不监听寻呼。
  23. 根据权利要求15～22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从终端设备或核心网设备接收第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示如下一项或多项：
    所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息；
    所述终端设备是否支持所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO；
    节能需求；或，
    请求将所述指示信息关联所述终端设备的多个PO。
  24. 根据权利要求15～23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息对应于所述终端设备所属的第一分组，所述第一分组包括一个或多 个终端设备。
  25. 一种终端设备，其特征在于，包括：
    一个或多个处理器；
    一个或多个存储器；
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述终端设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述终端设备执行如权利要求1～14中任一项任一所述的方法。
  26. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    一个或多个处理器；
    一个或多个存储器；
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述网络设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述网络设备执行如权利要求15～24中任一所述的方法。
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1～14中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求15～24中任意一项所述的方法。
  28. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括一个或多个处理器和通信接口，所述一个或多个处理器用于读取指令，以执行权利要求1～14中任意一项所述的方法，或者执行权利要求15～24中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/105007 2020-07-14 2021-07-07 一种通信方法及设备 WO2022012388A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010674448 2020-07-14
CN202010674448.7 2020-07-14
CN202010803120.0 2020-08-11
CN202010803120.0A CN113938995B (zh) 2020-07-14 2020-08-11 一种通信方法及设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022012388A1 true WO2022012388A1 (zh) 2022-01-20

Family

ID=79274137

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/105007 WO2022012388A1 (zh) 2020-07-14 2021-07-07 一种通信方法及设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113938995B (zh)
WO (1) WO2022012388A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115553000A (zh) * 2022-06-06 2022-12-30 北京小米移动软件有限公司 监听方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116803056A (zh) * 2022-01-20 2023-09-22 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种确定是否监听的方法、装置及存储介质
WO2023201734A1 (zh) * 2022-04-22 2023-10-26 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种信息传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019160271A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for changing status of wus operation and device supporting the same
US20190342833A1 (en) * 2018-05-07 2019-11-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Support for a Wireless Device with a Wake-Up Receiver
CN110831123A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2020-02-21 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 一种信号发送、接收方法、网络设备及终端
CN110945928A (zh) * 2019-11-05 2020-03-31 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼时机的监听方法、装置、终端及存储介质
CN110972237A (zh) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 唤醒信号资源的确定、指示方法及装置、终端、基站
CN111132280A (zh) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 信号传输方法及设备

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102362534A (zh) * 2009-05-15 2012-02-22 诺基亚公司 用于提供动态寻呼周期的方法和装置
EP2848081A1 (en) * 2012-05-09 2015-03-18 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Handling mtc long drx cycle/sleep lengths
WO2016163940A1 (en) * 2015-04-10 2016-10-13 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods wireless communication device and radio network node for managing paging
US10506472B2 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-12-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Narrowband reference signals in non-anchor resource blocks
WO2018174635A1 (ko) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 엘지전자 주식회사 페이징 메시지를 수신하는 방법 및 무선 기기
CN108668359B (zh) * 2017-03-28 2022-07-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种寻呼方法、寻呼监听方法及装置和设备
CN109286966B (zh) * 2017-07-21 2020-08-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 寻呼方法、终端、网络设备及计算机可读存储介质
US10820299B2 (en) * 2017-11-13 2020-10-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Radio resource management configuration for user equipment with wake-up signal receivers
EP4358641A2 (en) * 2018-09-26 2024-04-24 InterDigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Paging for unlicensed new radio
CN112956256B (zh) * 2018-11-20 2022-12-13 华为技术有限公司 监听或发送唤醒信号的方法和装置及通信设备
CN111294892A (zh) * 2018-12-07 2020-06-16 夏普株式会社 用户设备、基站及其方法
CN111356216B (zh) * 2018-12-24 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及其相关设备
CN111246503B (zh) * 2020-01-10 2023-03-14 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Rrm测量放松与寻呼监听方法、终端、网元及存储介质

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019160271A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for changing status of wus operation and device supporting the same
US20190342833A1 (en) * 2018-05-07 2019-11-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Support for a Wireless Device with a Wake-Up Receiver
CN110831123A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2020-02-21 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 一种信号发送、接收方法、网络设备及终端
CN110972237A (zh) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 唤醒信号资源的确定、指示方法及装置、终端、基站
CN111132280A (zh) * 2018-11-09 2020-05-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 信号传输方法及设备
CN110945928A (zh) * 2019-11-05 2020-03-31 北京小米移动软件有限公司 寻呼时机的监听方法、装置、终端及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SONY: "KI2: Solution for Paging Reception with PO collision avoidance", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-2000841, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Incheon, KR; 20200113 - 20200117, 7 January 2020 (2020-01-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051842895 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115553000A (zh) * 2022-06-06 2022-12-30 北京小米移动软件有限公司 监听方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
CN115553000B (zh) * 2022-06-06 2023-11-28 北京小米移动软件有限公司 监听方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113938995A (zh) 2022-01-14
CN113938995B (zh) 2023-09-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022012388A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021204215A1 (zh) 一种drx控制方法及装置
WO2020125433A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US20190053157A1 (en) NB-IoT UE Differentiation
WO2021179895A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US20220322285A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN116248241A (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
KR20220038425A (ko) 전력 절감 신호 전송 방법, 기지국 및 단말 기기
TW202034720A (zh) 通訊裝置及其省電方法
WO2021197233A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2020181943A1 (zh) 一种请求系统信息的方法及设备
WO2021134577A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置
US20230084797A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020164143A1 (zh) 非连续接收的方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN113950146B (zh) 一种寻呼方法和通信装置
WO2021138854A1 (zh) 一种信号发送、接收方法、装置及设备
WO2021197030A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2023241288A1 (zh) 一种唤醒信号传输方法及通信系统
WO2022017235A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2022017237A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2023284500A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2024012224A1 (zh) 一种通信的方法和装置
WO2024098846A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
RU2813262C1 (ru) Способ и устройство связи и считываемый компьютером носитель данных
WO2023098566A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21841868

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21841868

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1